Allen-Bradley 1336 PLUS Adjustable Frequency AC Drive User Manual

1336 PLUS
Adjustable
Frequency AC
Drive with
User
Manual
Please read the ATTENTION statements on pages
2–28 and 2–29 BEFORE installing the drive.
0.37 - 448 kW (0.5 - 600 HP)
FRN 1.xx - 4.xx
Important User Information
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from
those of electromechanical equipment. “Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls”
(Publication SGI-1.1) describes some important differences between
solid state equipment and hard–wired electromechanical devices.
Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of
uses for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying
this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended
application of this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will the Allen-Bradley Company be responsible or liable
for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or
application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for
illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, the
Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility or liability for
actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Allen-Bradley Company with
respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software
described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part,
without written permission of the Allen-Bradley Company is
prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
!
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices
or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or
death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• identify a hazard
• avoid the hazard
• recognize the consequences
Important: Identifies information that is especially important for
successful application and understanding of the product.
SCANport is a trademark of Allen-Bradley Company, Inc.
PLC is a registered trademark of Allen-Bradley Company, Inc.
COLOR-KEYED is a registered trademark of Thomas & Betts Corporation
Taptite is a registered trademark of Research Engineering and Manufacturing, Inc.
Summary of Changes
The information below summarizes the changes to the 1336 PLUS
User Manual since the last release.
Description of New or Updated Information
Cable length restrictions updated for “No External Devices –
1329 R/L Motors.”
Footnotes 6 & 7 have been clarified.
Caption under CR1 through CR4 (Figure 2.3) changed.
Analog Out (terminals 4 & 9 of Figure 2.3) clarified.
Description for [CR1-4 Out Select] clarified.
“Enabled” explanation for [Flt Clear Mode] clarified.
The “Action” response for F53, 54 & 66 updated.
Output ampere rating for C150 drives corrected.
Heat dissipation values added for BP250 through BP450.
Derate curve added for 1336S-CW10 through CW50.
Spare Parts information added.
!
See Page(s)
2–17
2–17
2–22
2–22
5–26
5–33
6–2
A–3, A–4
A–4
A–8
Appendix D
ATTENTION: With the release of Firmware Version
4.01 & up, the resolution of several parameters has
been enhanced to 0.1 units. In some cases this will also
affect the Minimum, Maximum and/or Default values
of these parameters. Users with PLC or SCANportt
device configurations must make the appropriate
programming changes. Failure to do so may result in
personal injury and/or equipment damage. The
parameters affected are:
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Maximum Speed
Motor NP Hertz
Base Frequency
Break Freq
Accel Time 1
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 1
Decel Time 2
DC Hold Time
S Curve Time
page 5–11, 5–14
page 5–11, 5–14
page 5–45
page 5–13, 5–46
page 5–53
page 5–52
page 5–10
page 5–16
page 5–10
page 5–16
page 5–17
page 5–23
Notes
Table of Contents
Information and
Precautions
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 2
Manual Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nameplate Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Supply Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Power Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Interference – EMI/RFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFI Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control and Signal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Interface Option – TB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting/Verifying Fan Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Inputs – TB4, TB6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Output – TB9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Board Installation and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Human Interface Module
3–1
3–4
3–15
Chapter 4
Start-Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming
2–1
2–2
2–3
2–4
2–5
2–6
2–7
2–8
2–8
2–8
2–11
2–21
2–23
2–34
2–34
2–35
2–36
2–37
2–37
2–38
Chapter 3
HIM Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Up
1–1
1–1
1–2
1–2
1–2
1–4
4–1
Chapter 5
Function Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5–1
5–1
5–6
ii
Table of Contents
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Fault Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications and
Supplemental Information
Appendix A
Dimensions
Appendix B
CE Conformity
Appendix C
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Supplied Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Derating Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Cross Reference – By Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Cross Reference – By Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIM Character Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Data Information Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Programmable Controller Communications Config. . . . . . . .
Typical Serial Communications Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read/Write Parameter Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements for Conforming Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Parts Information
Appendix D
6–1
6–8
A–1
A–4
A–5
A–10
A–11
A–12
A–13
A–14
A–15
A–16
C–1
C–2
C–3
C–3
C–4
Chapter
1
Chapter 1 provides information on the general intent of this manual,
gives an overall description of the 1336 PLUS Adjustable Frequency
AC Drive and provides a listing of key drive features.
Manual Objectives
This publication provides planning, installation, wiring and
diagnostic information for the 1336 PLUS Drive. To assure
successful installation and operation, the material presented must be
thoroughly read and understood before proceeding. Particular
attention must be directed to the Attention and Important statements
contained within.
Software Compatibility
!
ATTENTION: To guard against machine damage
and/or personal injury, drives with ratings above 45 kW
(60 HP) must not be used with software versions below
1.07. Refer to table below.
Three-Phase Drive Rating 1
200-240V
380-480V
500-600V
Compatible with
Version . . .
Frame
Reference
0.37-0.75 kW
0.5-1 HP
0.37-1.2 kW
0.5-1.5 HP
–
1.05 & Up or
1.06 w/std. Jog 2
A1
1.2-1.5 kW
1.5-2 HP
1.5-2.2 kW
2-3 HP
–
1.05 & Up or
1.06 w/std. Jog 2
A2
2.2-3.7 kW
3-5 HP
3.7 kW
5 HP
–
1.05 & Up or
1.06 w/std. Jog 2
A3
–
5.5-7.5 kW
7.5-10 HP
0.75-3.7 kW
1-5 HP
3.01 & Up (380-480V)
3.02 & Up (500-600V)
A4
5.5-11 kW
7.5-15 HP
5.5-22 kW
7.5-30 HP
5.5-15 kW
7.5-20 HP
1.05 & Up or
1.06 w/std. Jog 2
B1/B2
15-22 kW
20-30 HP
30-45 kW
40-60 HP
18.5-45 kW
25-60 HP
1.05 & Up or
1.06 w/std. Jog 2
C
30-45 kW
40-60 HP
45-112 kW
60-150 HP
56-93 kW
75-125 HP
2.01 & Up
D
56-93 kW
75-125 HP
112-187- kW
150-250 HP
112-187 kW
150-250 HP
2.01 & Up
E
–
112-336- kW
250-450 HP
187-336 kW
250-450 HP
4.01 & Up
F
–
187-448 kW
250-600 HP
224-448 kW
300-600 HP
2.01 & Up
G
1
2
kW and HP are constant torque.
See pages 2–28 and 2–29.
1–2
Information and Precautions
General Precautions
!
!
!
!
Conventions Used in this
Manual
ATTENTION: This drive contains ESD
(Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and
assemblies. Static control precautions are required
when installing, testing, servicing or repairing this
assembly. Component damage may result if ESD
control procedures are not followed. If you are not
familiar with static control procedures, reference A-B
publication 8000-4.5.2, “Guarding Against
Electrostatic Damage” or any other applicable ESD
protection handbook.
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed
drive can result in component damage or a reduction in
product life. Wiring or application errors, such as,
undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC
supply, or excessive ambient temperatures may result
in malfunction of the system.
ATTENTION: Only personnel familiar with the
1336 PLUS Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and
associated machinery should plan or implement the
installation, start-up and subsequent maintenance of the
system. Failure to comply may result in personal
injury and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: To avoid a hazard of electric shock,
verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has
discharged before performing any work on the drive.
Measure the DC bus voltage at the + & – terminals of
TB1. The voltage must be zero.
To help differentiate parameter names and display text from other
text in this manual, the following conventions will be used:
• Parameter Names will appear in [brackets]
• Display Text will appear in “quotes”
Catalog Number Explanation
The diagram on the following page describes the 1336 PLUS catalog
numbering scheme.
Information and Precautions
1–3
1336S
BR
F30
AA
EN
MODS
First Position
Second Position
Third Position
Fourth Position
Fifth Position
Sixth Position
Bulletin Number
Voltage
Nominal HP Rating
Enclosure Type
Language
Options
Letter
Voltages
Code
kW (HP)
Code
Type
Code
AQ
200-240V AC or
310V DC
F05
F07
F10
F15
F20
F30
F50
F75
F100
0.37 (0.5)
0.56 (0.75)
0.75 (1)
1.2 (1.5)
1.5 (2)
2.2 (3)
3.7 (5)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
AA
IP 20 (NEMA 1)
AE
IP 20 (NEMA 1)/
EMC
0.37-45 kW
(0.5-60 HP) only
EN3 English/English V3.04
EN4 English/English V4.xx
007
010
015
020
025
030
040
050
060
075
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
11 (15)
15 (20)
18.5 (25)
22 (30)
30 (40)
37 (50)
45 (60)
56 (75)
75 (100)
93 (125)
112 (150)
149 (200)
187 (250) 1
224 (300) 1
261 (350) 1
298 (400) 1
336 (450) 1
373 (500) 1
448 (600) 1
BR
380-480VAC or
513-620V DC
CW
500-600V AC or
775V DC
or
A
200-240V AC
B
380-480V AC
BP
380-480V AC
(F Frame)
BX
Special Rating
C
500-600V AC
Q
310V DC
R
513-620V DC
RX
Special Rating
W
775V DC
Code
AJ
IP 54 (NEMA 12) 2 IT3
IT4
IP 00 (Open)
Description
English/Italian V3.04
English/Italian V4.xx
ES3 English/Spanish V3.04
ES4 English/Spanish V4.xx
Code
Description
Human Interface Module, IP 20 (Type 1)
Communication Options
HAB
HAP
HA1
HA2
GM1 Single Point Remote I/O
GM2 RS–232/422/485, DF1 & DH485
GM5 DeviceNet
Blank – No Functionality
Programmer Only
Programmer/Controller w/Analog Pot
Programmer/Controller w/Digital Pot
HJP Programmer Only
HJ2 Programmer/Controller w/Digital Pot
2
DE3 English/German V3.04
DE4 English/German V4.xx
IP 65 (NEMA 4) 2
Human Interface Module, IP 65/54 (Type 4/12)
1
FR3 English/French V3.04
FR4 English/French V4.xx
AF
AN
Language
Control Interface Options
L4
L4E
L5
L5E
L6
L6E
TTL Contact
TTL Contact & Encoder Feedback
24V AC/DC
24V AC/DC & Encoder Feedback
115V AC
115V AC & Encoder Feedback
G Frame Drives in enclosed construction are supplied through the Configured Drives Program.
D through G Frame drives in IP 65 (NEMA Type 4) and IP 54 (NEMA Type 12) configurations are supplied through the Configured Drives Program.
1–4
Information and Precautions
Nameplate Location
1336 PLUS Nameplate Location
1 Refer to page 1-1 for frame reference classifications.
ESC
SEL
JOG
Frames1 A1, A2, A3, A4
Nameplate Located on
Bottom Portion of
Chassis Behind Cover
Frames1 B - G
Nameplate Located on
Mounting Plate of
Main Control Board
Chapter
2
Chapter 2 provides the information you need to properly mount and
wire the 1336 PLUS Drive. Since most start-up difficulties are the
result of incorrect wiring, every precaution must be taken to assure
that the wiring is done as instructed. All items must be read and
understood before the actual installation begins.
ATTENTION: The following information is merely
a guide for proper installation. The Allen-Bradley
Company cannot assume responsibility for the
compliance or the noncompliance to any code,
national, local or otherwise for the proper installation
of this drive or associated equipment. A hazard of
personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if
codes are ignored during installation.
!
Mounting
Minimum Mounting Requirements for Proper Heat Dissipation
(Dimensions shown are between drives or other devices)
152.4 mm
(6.0 in.)
152.4 mm
(6.0 in.)
101.6 mm
(4.0 in.)
ESC
SEL
ESC
SEL
JOG
JOG
UP
152.4 mm
(6.0 in.)
152.4 mm
(6.0 in.)
NOTE: F Frame drives require 152.4 mm (6.0 in.) on the sides and/or back for proper air flow.
2–2
Installation/Wiring
Installation Guidelines
GND
AC Supply Source
Page 2–3
CAT. NO.
FREQUENCY
POWER RATING
PRIMARY VOLTAGE
SECONDARY VOLTAGE
INSULATION CLASS
NO. OF PHASES
VENDOR PART NO.
Input Power Conditioning
Page 2–4
Input Fusing
Page 2–5
Input Devices
Page 2–6
Input Filters
Page 2–7
Electrical Interference
Page 2–7
Grounding
Page 2–8
ALLEN-BRADLEY
PE R S T
GND (L1) (L2) (L3)
ESC
SEL
JOG
Power Cabling
Page 2–11
Control & Signal Cabling
Page 2–21
PE (T1) (T2) (T3)
GND U V W
Output Devices
Page 2–34
Cable Termination
Page 2–34
Motor
Installation/Wiring
AC Supply Source
2–3
1336 PLUS drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of
delivering up to a maximum of 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes,
600 volts maximum when used with the AC input line fuses
specified in Table 2.A.
ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/or
equipment damage caused by improper fusing, use only
the recommended line fuses specified in Table 2.A.
!
Unbalanced Distribution Systems
This drive is designed to operate on three-phase supply systems
whose line voltages are symmetrical. Surge suppression devices are
included to protect the drive from lightning induced overvoltages
between line and ground. Where the potential exists for abnormally
high phase-to-ground voltages (in excess of 125% of nominal), or
where the supply ground is tied to another system or equipment that
could cause the ground potential to vary with operation, suitable
isolation is required for the drive. Where this potential exists, an
isolation transformer is strongly recommended.
Ungrounded Distribution Systems
All 1336 PLUS drives are equipped with an MOV (Metal Oxide
Varistor) that provides voltage surge protection and phase-to-phase
plus phase-to-ground protection which is designed to meet IEEE
587. The MOV circuit is designed for surge suppression only
(transient line protection), not continuous operation.
With ungrounded distribution systems, the phase-to-ground MOV
connection could become a continuous current path to ground.
Energy ratings are listed below. Exceeding the published line-to-line
and line-to-ground voltage ratings may cause physical damage to the
MOV. Refer to page A–1.
Three-Phase
AC Input
Ground
R
S
T
Joules = (A)
Joules = (A)
Joules = (A)
Joules = (B)
1
2
3
Line-to-Line MOV Rating
Energy Rating = 2 x Line-Line Rating (A)
Line-to-Ground MOV Rating
Energy Rating = Line-Line (A) + Line-Ground (B)
4
Frame Reference
A
B-C
D-G
Device Rating (V)
240 480 600
240 480 600
240 480 600
Line-Line (A)
Line-Ground (B)
160 140 NA
220 220 NA
160 160 160
220 220 220
140 140 150
220 220 220
2–4
Installation/Wiring
Input Power Conditioning
In general, the 1336 PLUS is suitable for direct connection to an AC
line of the correct voltage. Certain conditions can exist, however,
that prompt consideration of a line reactor or isolation transformer
ahead of the drive.
The basic rules to aid in determining whether a line reactor or
isolation transformer should be considered are as follows:
1. If the AC source experiences frequent power outages or
significant voltage transients, users should calculate the kVAmax
(see formula below). If the source transformer kVA exceeds the
calculated kVAmax and the drive is installed close to the source, it
is an indication that there may be enough energy behind these
voltage transients to cause nuisance input fuse blowing,
overvoltage faults or drive power structure damage. In these
cases, a line reactor or isolation transformer should be considered.
Zdrive (Ω/Φ) =
VAmax =
Vline–line
√3 x Input Amps
(Vline–line)2 x % Source Leakage (5-6% typical)
Zdrive x 0.01
2. If the AC source does not have a neutral or one phase referenced
to ground (see Unbalanced Distribution Systems on page 2–3),
an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary
grounded is highly recommended. If the line-to-ground voltages
on any phase can exceed 125% of the nominal line-to-line
voltage, an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary
grounded, is highly recommended.
3. If the AC line supplying the drive has power factor correction
capacitors that are switched in and out, an isolation transformer or
5% line reactor is recommended between the drive and
capacitors. If the capacitors are permanently connected and not
switched, the general rules above apply.
Installation/Wiring
2–5
Input Fusing
!
ATTENTION: The 1336 PLUS does not provide
input power short circuit fusing. Specifications for the
recommended fuse size and type to provide drive input
power protection against short circuits are provided.
Branch circuit breakers or disconnect switches cannot
provide this level of protection for drive components.
Table 2.A
Maximum Recommended AC Input Line Fuse Ratings (fuses are user supplied)
European
Installations
North American
Installations
Drive Catalog
Number
kW (HP) Rating
200-240V
Rating
380-480V
Rating
500-600V
Rating
The recommended fuse is Class gG,
general industrial applications and
motor circuit protection..
UL requirements specify
that UL Class CC, T or J 1
fuses must be used for all
drives in this section*.
*.
1336S- _ _ F05, 7
1336S- _ _ F10
1336S- _ _ F15
1336S- _ _ F20
1336S- _ _ F30
1336S- _ _ F50
1336S- _ _ F75
1336S- _ _ F100
1336S- _ _ 007
1336S- _ _ 010
1336S- _ _ 015
1336S- _ _ 020
1336S- _ _ 025
1336S- _ _ 030
1336S- _ _ 040
1336S- _ _ 050
1336S- _ _ X060
1336S- _ _ 060
1336S- _ _ 075
1336S- _ _ 100
1336S- _ _ 125
1336S- _ _ X150
1336S- _ _ 150
1336S- _ _ 200
1336S- _ _ 250
1336S- _ _ X300
1336S- _ P250 3
1336S- _ _ X250
1336S- _ _ 300
1336S- _ P300 3
1336S- _ _ 350
1336S- _ P350 3
1336S- _ _ 400
1336S- _ P400 3
1336S- _ _ 450
1336S- _ P450 3
1336S- _ _ 500
1336S- _ _ 600
0.37-0.56 (0.5-0.75)
0.75 (1)
1.2 (1.5)
1.5 (2)
2.2 (3)
3.7 (5)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
11 (15)
15 (20)
18.5 (25)
22 (30)
30 (40)
37 (50)
45 (60)
45 (60)
56 (75)
75 (100)
93 (125)
112 (150)
112 (150)
149 (200)
187 (250)
224 (300)
187 (250)
187 (250)
224 (300)
224 (300)
261 (350)
261 (350)
298 (400)
298 (400)
336 (450)
336 (450)
373 (500)
448 (600)
6A 2
10A 2
15A 2
15A 2
25A 2
40A 2
–
–
40A
50A
70A
100A
100A
125A
150A
200A
–
250A
300A
400A
450A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
3A 2
6A 2
6A 2
10A 2
15A 2
20A 2
20A 2
30A 2
20A
30A
35A
45A
60A
70A
80A
100A
100A
125A
150A
200A
250A
250A
300A
400A
450A
–
450A 3
450A
450A
500A 3
500A
600A 3
600A
600A 3
800A
700A 3
800A
900A
–
6A 2
BS88
88 (British Standard) Parts 1 & 2*,
2*
EN60269-1,
2 1 Parts 1 & 22, type gG
G or
equivalent should be used for these
drives.. Fuses that meet BS88
88 Parts 1
& 2 are acceptable for Frames A - F..
* Typical designations include, but
may not be limited to the following:
w
* Typical designations
include:
Type CC: K
KTK,
K FNQ-R
Q
Type J: JKS, LPJ
Type T: JJS, JJN
Parts 1 & 22: AC, AD, BC, BD, CD,
DD, ED, EFS, EF, FF, FG,
G GF,
G GG
GG,
G .
GH.
The recommended fuse is Class gG,
general industrial applications and
motor circuit protection..
88 (British Standard) Part 4,
BS88
EN60269-1,
2 1 Part 4*,
* type gG
G semiconductor fuses or equivalent should
be used for these drives.. G Frame
drives require semiconductor fuses
and should be fused with
w Part 4 fuses..
Bussmann FWP/Gould
w
7 Q or Q
Shawmut
A-70Q
QS
semiconductor type fuses
must be used for all drives
in this section.
* Typical designations include, but
w
may not be limited to the following:
Part 4: CT, ET, FE, EET, FEE, RFEE,
FM, FMM.
1
Both fast acting and slow blow are acceptable.
2
Dual element-time delay fuses are required.
3
–
10A 2
15A 2
20A 2
–
–
15A
20A
25A
35A
40A
50A
60A
80A
–
90A
110A
150A
175A
–
225A
350A
400A
400A
–
–
400A
–
450A
–
500A
–
600A
–
800A
800A
Fuses are supplied with F Frame drives.
2–6
Installation/Wiring
Input Devices
Starting and Stopping the Motor
!
ATTENTION: The drive start/stop control circuitry
includes solid-state components. If hazards due to
accidental contact with moving machinery or
unintentional flow of liquid, gas or solids exist, an
additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to
remove AC line power to the drive. When AC power is
removed, there will be a loss of inherent regenerative
braking effect & the motor will coast to a stop. An
auxiliary braking method may be required.
Repeated Application/Removal of Input Power
!
ATTENTION: The drive is intended to be controlled
by control input signals that will start and stop the
motor. A device that routinely disconnects then
reapplies line power to the drive for the purpose of
starting and stopping the motor is not recommended.
Bypass Contactors
!
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed
bypass system can result in component damage or
reduction in product life. The most common causes
are:
• Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals.
• Improper bypass or output circuits not approved by
Allen-Bradley.
• Output circuits which do not connect directly to the
motor.
Contact Allen-Bradley for assistance with application
or wiring.
Installation/Wiring
Electrical Interference –
EMI/RFI
2–7
Immunity
The immunity of 1336 PLUS drives to externally generated
interference is good. Usually, no special precautions are required
beyond the installation practices provided in this publication.
It is recommended that the coils of DC energized contactors
associated with drives be suppressed with a diode or similar device,
since they can generate severe electrical transients.
Emission
Careful attention must be given to the arrangement of power and
ground connections to the drive to avoid interference with nearby
sensitive equipment. The cable to the motor carries switched
voltages and should be routed well away from sensitive equipment.
The ground conductor of the motor cable should be connected to the
drive ground (PE) terminal directly. Connecting this ground
conductor to a cabinet ground point or ground bus bar may cause
high frequency current to circulate in the ground system of the
enclosure. The motor end of this ground conductor must be solidly
connected to the motor case ground.
Shielded or armored cable may be used to guard against radiated
emissions from the motor cable. The shield or armor should be
connected to the drive ground (PE) terminal and the motor ground as
outlined above.
Common mode chokes at the drive output can help reduce common
mode noise on installations that do not use shielded cable. Common
mode chokes can also be used on analog or communication cables.
Refer to page 2–34 for further information.
An RFI filter can be used and in most situations provides an effective
reduction of RFI emissions that may be conducted into the main
supply lines.
If the installation combines a drive with sensitive devices or circuits,
it is recommended that the lowest possible drive PWM carrier
frequency be programmed.
2–8
Installation/Wiring
RFI Filtering
1336 PLUS drives can be installed with an RFI filter, which controls
radio-frequency conducted emissions into the main supply lines and
ground wiring.
If the cabling and installation recommendation precautions described
in this manual are adhered to, it is unlikely that interference
problems will occur when the drive is used with conventional
industrial electronic circuits and systems. However, a filter may be
required if there is a likelihood of sensitive devices or circuits being
installed on the same AC supply.
Where it is essential that very low emission levels must be achieved
or if conformity with standards is required the optional RFI filter
must be used. Refer to Appendix C and instructions included with the
filter for installation and grounding information.
CE Conformity
Refer to Appendix C.
Grounding
Refer to the grounding diagram on page 2–10. The drive must be
connected to system ground at the power ground (PE) terminal
provided on the power terminal block (TB1). Ground impedance
must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial
safety regulations (NEC, VDE 0160, BSI, etc.) and should be
inspected and tested at appropriate and regular intervals.
In any cabinet, a single, low-impedance ground point or ground bus
bar should be used. All circuits should be grounded independently
and directly. The AC supply ground conductor should also be
connected directly to this ground point or bus bar.
Sensitive Circuits
It is essential to define the paths through which the high frequency
ground currents flow. This will assure that sensitive circuits do not
share a path with such current. Control and signal conductors should
not be run near or parallel to power conductors.
Motor Cable
The ground conductor of the motor cable (drive end) must be
connected directly to the drive ground (PE) terminal, not to the
enclosure bus bar. Grounding directly to the drive (and filter, if
installed) can provide a direct route for high frequency current
returning from the motor frame and ground conductor. At the motor
end, the ground conductor should also be connected to the motor
case ground.
If shielded or armored cables are used, the shield/armor should also
be grounded at both ends as described above.
Installation/Wiring
2–9
Encoder & Communications Cabling
If encoder connections or communications cables are used, the wiring must be separated from power cabling. This can be accomplished
with carefully routed, shielded cable (ground cable shield at the drive
end only) or a separate steel conduit (grounded at both ends). Belden
9730, 8777 (or equivalent) is recommended for encoder cable runs
less than 30 meters (100 feet). Belden 9773 (or equivalent) is recommended for encoder cable runs greater than 30 meters (100 feet).
Discrete Control and Signal Wiring
The control and signal wiring must be grounded at a single point in
the system, remote from the drive. This means the 0V or ground
terminal should be grounded at the equipment end, not the drive end.
If shielded control and signal wires are used, the shield must also be
grounded at this point.
If the control and signal wires are short, and contained within a
cabinet which has no sensitive circuits, the use of shielded control
and signal wiring is not necessary. The recommended control signal
wire is:
• Belden 8760 (or equiv.)–0.750 mm2 (18 AWG), twisted pair, shielded.
• Belden 8770 (or equiv.)–0.750 mm2 (18 AWG), 3 conductor, shielded.
• Belden 9460 (or equiv.)–0.750 mm2 (18 AWG), twisted pair, shielded.
Shield Termination – TE (True Earth)
The TE terminal block (not available on 0.37-7.5 kW (0.5-10 HP) A
Frame drives) is used for all control signal shields internal to the
drive. It must be connected to an earth ground by a separate
continuous lead. Refer to Figure 2.1/2.3 for location.
The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by this block is 2.1
and 0.30 mm2 (14 and 22 AWG). Maximum torque is 1.36 N-m
(12 lb.-in.). Use Copper wire Only.
Safety Ground – PE
This is the safety ground required by code. This point must be
connected to adjacent building steel (girder, joist) or a floor ground
rod, provided grounding points comply with NEC regulations. If a
cabinet ground bus is used, refer to Grounding on page 2–8.
RFI Filter
Important:
Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively
high ground leakage currents. Surge suppression
devices are also incorporated in the filter. Therefore, the
filter must be permanently installed and solidly
grounded to the supply neutral. Grounding must not
rely on flexible cables and should not include any form
of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent
disconnection. The integrity of this connection should
be periodically checked.
2–10
Installation/Wiring
General Grounding
Common
Mode
Core*
U (T1)
Conduit/4-Wire Cable
R (L1)
ESC
S (L2)
Shield*
V (T2)
SEL
JOG
W (T3)
PE/Gnd.
T (L3)
Shield
Motor Frame
PE
Motor
Terminator*
RIO/DH+
or Analog
Common
Mode Core*
Nearest
Building Structure Steel
To Computer/Position Controller
(for TE shield ground, see "Control Connections")
PE
Ground per
Local Codes
* Options that can be installed as
needed. See pages 2–34 and 2–35.
Single-Point Grounding/Panel Layout
R (L1)
S (L2)
To Nearest Building
Structure Steel
T (L3)
For Programmable Controller
grounding recommendations,
refer to publication 1770-4.1
TE – Zero Volt Potential Bus
(Isolated from Panel)
1336 FORCE
1336 PLUS
Nearest
Building Structure Steel
ESC
SEL
JOG
Logic
PE
Logic
TE
Nearest Building
Structure Steel
PE
PE Ground Bus
(Grounded to Panel)
Important: Grounding requirements will vary with the drives being used. Drives with True Earth (TE) terminals must have a zero potential bus, separate from potential
earth (PE) ground bus. Note that buses can be tied together at one point in the control cabinet or brought back separately to the building ground grid (tied within 3
meters (10 feet)).
Installation/Wiring
Power Cabling
2–11
Input and output power connections are performed through terminal
block, TB1 (see Figure 2.1 for location).
Important:
For maintenance and setup procedures, the drive may
be operated without a motor connected.
Table 2.B
TB1 Signals
Description
Potential Earth Ground
Shield Termination – True Earth
AC Line Input Terminals
DC Bus Terminals
Motor Connection
Terminal
PE
TE
R (L1), S (L2), T (L3)
+DC, –DC
U (T1), V (T2), W (T3)
ATTENTION: The National Codes and standards
(NEC, VDE, BSI etc.) and local codes outline
provisions for safely installing electrical equipment.
Installation must comply with specifications regarding
wire types, conductor sizes, branch circuit protection
and disconnect devices. Failure to do so may result in
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
!
Figure 2.1
Terminal Block Locations
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB6
TB9
TE
Power Terminal Block
Control & Signal Wiring
Control Interface Option
24V DC Auxiliary Input
High Voltage DC Auxiliary Input
480V Output (F Frame Only)
Shield Terminals
R, S, T
TB9
TB3
TB3
TB4
TB6
Control Interface
Option
TB3
TB1
Frames A1-A4 1
1
TB3
Control Interface
Option
TB2
TB1
Control Interface
Option
TB1
Frames B, C 1
TB3
TB2
TB1
TB1
Location
Frames D, E 1
Refer to page 1–1 for frame reference classifications and Figure 2.2 for TB1 details.
TB4
TB2
TE
TB6
TB1 Location
TB1
Brake
Terminals
TB1
TB2
TE
TB2
TE
TB1
Location
U, V, W
& Brake
Terminals
PE
Ground
Frame F 1
Frame G 1
2–12
Installation/Wiring
Table 2.C
TB1 Specifications – Use 75° C Copper wire Only
Drive Frame
Size
Max./Min. Wire Size 1
mm 2 (AWG)
Maximum Torque
N-m (lb.-in.)
A1-A4 (page 2–18)
B1 (page 2–18)
5.3/0.8 (10/18)
8.4/0.8 (8/18)
1.81 (16)
1.81 (16)
B2 (page 2–18)
C (page 2–18)
13.3/0.5 (6/20)
26.7/0.8 (3/18)
1.70 (15)
5.65 (50)
D (page 2–19) 3
127.0/2.1 (250 MCM/14)
67.4/2.1 (00/14) 2
6.00 (52)
6.00 (52)
E (page 2–19) 3
F (page 2–20) 3
253.0/2.1 (500 MCM/14)
303.6/2.1 (600 MCM/14)
10.00 (87)
23.00 (200)
G (page 2–20) 3
303.6/2.1 (600 MCM/14)
23.00 (200)
1
Wire sizes given are maximum/minimum sizes that TB1 will accept – these are not recommendations.
2 Applies to 30 kW (40 HP) 200-240V, 45 & 56 kW (60 & 75 HP) 380-480V, 56 kW (75 HP) 500-600V
drives only.
3 These configurations of TB1 are stud type terminations and require the use of lug type connectors to
terminate field installed conductors. Lug kits are available for use with these configurations. Wire size
used is determined by selecting the proper lug based on the drive catalog number. Refer to Table 2.D.
Lug Kits
D, E, F and G Frame drives have stud type terminals and/or bus
bars/bolts that require standard “crimp type” connectors for cable
termination. Connectors such as T & B Color-Keyed connectors (or
equivalent) are recommended. The following table shows the lug
selection for one possible cable choice. Connectors for each
installation should be chosen based on desired cable sizes, the
application requirements and all applicable national, state and local
codes. See the minimum/maximum values for wire size per Table
2.C.
Installation/Wiring
2–13
Table 2.D
Lug Selection
Drive
Dri e Catalog
t o
Number
1
AC Input R, S, T
Output U, V, W and PE
Cable (per Phase)
T&B Part No.3
1336S–A040
1336S–A050
1336S–A060
1336S–A075
Qty.
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
mm 2 (AWG)
53.5 (1/0)
85.0 (3/0)
107.2 (4/0)
53.5 (1/0)
1336S–A100
(2)
85.0 (3/0)
1336S–A125
(2)
107.2 (4/0)
1336S–B060
1336S–B075
1336S–B100
1336S–B125
1336S–BX150
1336S–B150
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
42.4 (1)
53.5 (1/0)
85.0 (3/0)
107.2 (4/0)
107.2 (4/0)
53.5 (1/0)
1336S–B200
(2)
85.0 (3/0)
1336S–B250
(2)
107.2 (4/0)
1336S–BX250
1336S–BP250
1336S–B300
1336S–BP300
1336S–B350
1336S–BP350
1336S–B400
1336S–BP400
1336S–B450
1336S–BP450
1336S–B500
1336S–B600
1336S–C075
1336S–C100
1336S–C125
1336S–C150
1336S–C200
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
53.5 (1/0)
53.5 (1/0)
67.4 (2/0)
67.4 (2/0)
85.0 (3/0)
85.0 (3/0)
107.2 (4/0)
107.2 (4/0)
127.0 (250 MCM)
127.0 (250 MCM)
152.0 (300 MCM)
152.0 (300 MCM)
33.6 (2)
53.5 (1/0)
67.4 (2/0)
107.2 (4/0)
67.4 (2/0)
1336S–C250
(2)
85.0 (3/0)
1336S–CX300
1336S–C300
1336S–C350
1336S–C400
1336S–C450
1336S–C500
1336S–C600
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
85.0 (3/0)
85.0 (3/0)
53.5 (1/0)
67.4 (2/0)
85.0 (3/0)
107.2 (4/0)
127.0 (250 MCM)
Qty.
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(24)
(24)
(24)
(24)
(24)
(24)
(24)
(24)
(24)
(24)
(24)
(24)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(16)
(16)
(24)
(24)
(24)
(24)
(24)
Number
54153 1
54163 1
54168 1
54109T
54109B
54111T
54111B
54112T
54112B
54147 1
54153 1
54163 1
54168 1
54168 1
54109T
54109B
54111T
54111B
54112T
54112B
54109
54109
54110
54110
54111
54111
54112
54112
54174
54174
54179
54179
54142 1
54153 1
54158 1
54111
54110T
54110B
54111T
54111B
54111
54111
54109
54110
54111
54112
54174
DC+
DC– 2
Cable (per Phase)
T&B Part No.3
TE
Cable (per Phase)
T&B Part No.3
Qty.
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
mm 2 (AWG)
13.3 (6)
13.3 (6)
13.3 (6)
33.6 (2)
Qty.
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
Number
54135 1
54135 1
54135 1
54109
Qty.
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
mm 2 (AWG)
13.3 (6)
13.3 (6)
21.2 (4)
21.2 (4)
Qty.
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
Number
54135 1
54135 1
54139 1
54139 1
(1)
42.4 (1)
(2)
54148
(1)
33.6 (2)
(1)
54142 1
(1)
67.4 (2/0)
(2)
54110
(1)
33.6 (2)
(1)
54142 1
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
8.4 (8)
13.3 (6)
13.3 (6)
26.7 (3)
26.7 (3)
33.6 (2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
54131 1
54135 1
54135 1
54147 1
54147 1
54110
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
13.3 (6)
13.3 (6)
13.3 (6)
21.2 (4)
21.2 (4)
21.2 (4)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
54135 1
54135 1
54135 1
54139 1
54139 1
54139 1
(1)
42.4 (1)
(2)
54148
(1)
26.7 (3)
(1)
54142 1
(1)
67.4 (2/0)
(2)
54110
(1)
33.6 (2)
(1)
54142 1
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
67.4 (2/0)
67.4 (2/0)
42.4 (1)
42.4 (1)
42.4 (1)
42.4 (1)
42.4 (1)
42.4 (1)
42.4 (1)
42.4 (1)
53.5 (1/0)
53.5 (1/0)
13.3 (6)
13.3 (6)
26.7 (3)
42.4 (1)
42.4 (1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
54110
54110
54148
54148
54148
54148
54148
54148
54148
54148
54109
54109
54135 1
54135 1
54147 1
54148
54148
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
8.4 (8)
13.3 (6)
13.3 (6)
13.3 (6)
26.7 (3)
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
54131 1
54135 1
54135 1
54135 1
54142 1
(1)
67.4 (2/0)
(2)
54110
(1)
26.7 (3)
(1)
54142 1
Consult Factory
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
5/16” Stud. All other studs are 3/8”.
Lugs shown for DC+/– are based on dynamic brake sizing of 50% of (motor rating X 1.25). Select proper lugs based on required braking torque. Refer to 1336-5.64
or 1336-5.65 for additional information.
3 T & B COLOR-KEYED Connectors require T & B WT117 or TBM–6 Crimper tool or equivalent. Lugs should be crimped according to manufacturer’s tool
instructions. If required, Rockwell Automation can supply lug kits for lugs shown above. Kits do not include crimping tools. Consult factory for kit information.
2
2–14
Installation/Wiring
Motor Cables
A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations. For
many installations, unshielded cable is adequate, provided it can be
separated from sensitive circuits. As an approximate guide, allow a
spacing of 0.3 meters (1 foot) for every 10 meters (32.8 feet) of
length. In all cases, long parallel runs must be avoided. Do not use
cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 15 mils.
The cable should be 4-conductor with the ground lead being
connected directly to the drive ground terminal (PE) and the motor
frame ground terminal.
Shielded Cable
Shielded cable is recommended if sensitive circuits or devices are
connected or mounted to the machinery driven by the motor. The
shield must be connected to both the drive ground (drive end) and
motor frame ground (motor end). The connection must be made at
both ends to minimize interference.
If cable trays or large conduits are to be used to distribute the motor
leads for multiple drives, shielded cable is recommended to reduce
or capture the noise from the motor leads and minimize “cross
coupling” of noise between the leads of different drives. The shield
should be connected to the ground connections at both the motor and
drive end.
Armored cable also provides effective shielding. Ideally it should be
grounded only at the drive (PE) and motor frame. Some armored
cable has a PVC coating over the armor to prevent incidental contact
with grounded structure. If, due to the type of connector, the armor is
grounded at the cabinet entrance, shielded cable should be used
within the cabinet if power leads will be run close to control signals.
In some hazardous environments it is not permissible to ground both
ends of the cable armor because of the possibility of high current
circulating at the input frequency if the ground loop is cut by a
strong magnetic field. This only applies in the proximity of powerful
electrical machines. In such cases, consult factory for specific
guidelines.
Installation/Wiring
2–15
Conduit
If metal conduit is preferred for cable distribution, the following
guidelines must be followed.
• Drives are normally mounted in cabinets and ground connections
are made at a common ground point in the cabinet. Normal
installation of conduit provides grounded connections to both the
motor frame ground (junction box) and drive cabinet ground.
These ground connections help minimize interference. This is a
noise reduction recommendation only, and does not affect the
requirements for safety grounding (refer to pages 2–8 and
2–9).
• No more than three sets of motor leads can be routed through a
single conduit. This will minimize “cross talk” that could reduce
the effectiveness of the noise reduction methods described. If
more than three drive/motor connections per conduit are required,
shielded cable as described above must be used. If practical, each
conduit should contain only one set of motor leads.
!
ATTENTION: To avoid a possible shock hazard
caused by induced voltages, unused wires in the
conduit must be grounded at both ends. For the same
reason, if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or
installed, all drives using this conduit should be
disabled. This will eliminate the possible shock hazard
from “cross coupled” drive motor leads.
Motor Lead Lengths
Installations with long cables to the motor may require the addition
of output reactors or cable terminators to limit voltage reflections at
the motor. Refer to Tables 2.E and 2.F for the maximum length cable
allowed for various installation techniques.
For installations that exceed the recommended maximum lengths
listed, contact the factory.
2–16
Installation/Wiring
Table 2.E
Maximum Motor Cable Length Restrictions in meters (feet) – 380V-480V Drives 1
No External Devices
Motor
A
B
1329
1329R/L
Dri e
Drive
Frame
r e
Dri e kW
Drive
W
(HP)
Motor
otor kW
W
(HP)
Any
Cable
Any
Cable
Any
Cable
Any
Cable 7
A1
0.37 (0.5)
0.37 (0.5)
0.75 (1)
0.75 (1)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
18.3
(60)
18.3
(60)
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
30.5
(100)
53.3
(175)
53.3
(175)
53.3
(175)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
114.3
(375)
91.4
(300)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
91.4
(300)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
121.9
(400)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
0.37 (0.5)
A2
1.2 (1.5)
1.2 (1.5)
0.75 (1)
0.37 (0.5)
1.5 (2)
1.5 (2)
1.2 (1.5)
0.75 (1)
0.37 (0.5)
2.2 (3)
2.2 (3)
1.5 (2)
0.75 (1)
0.37 (0.5)
A3
3.7 (5)
3.7 (5)
2.2 (3)
1.5 (2)
0.75 (1)
0.37 (0.5)
A4
B
C
D
E
F
G
5.5-7.5
(7.5-10)
5.5-22
(7.5-30)
30-45
(X40-X60)
45-112
(60-X150)
112-187
(150-250)
187-336
(250-450)
187-448
(X250-600)
5.5-7.5
(7.5-10)
5.5-22
(7.5-30)
30-45
(40-60)
45-112
(60-150)
112-224
(150-300)
187-336
(250-450)
187-448
(250-600)
Type A Motor Characteristics:
Type B Motor Characteristics:
1329R Motors:
Reactor at Drive 2
Motor
w/ 1204-TFB2 Term.
Motor
w/ 1204-TFA1 Terminator
Motor
A or B
Cable Type
Shld. 3 Unshld.
A
Cable Type
Shld.3
Unshld.
B
Cable Type
Shld.3
Unshld.
1329
A
B or 1329
Any
Cable
Any
Cable
Any
Cable
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
121.9
(400)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
24.4
(80)
24.4
(80)
76.2
(250)
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
1329
Any
Cable
Use 1204-TFA1
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
Note
182.9
(600)
For
applications/ 182.9
installations (600)
using new
w
182.9
motors, no
restrictions in (600)
lead length 182.9
(600)
due to
voltage
182.9
reflection are (600)
necessary..
You should 182.9
(600)
observe
standard
182.9
practices for (600)
voltage drop,
182.9
cable
capacitance, (600)
182.9
and other
issues..
(600)
For retrofit
182.9
situations,
(600)
check w
with
182.9
the motor
(600)
manufacturer
for insulation 182.9
(600)
rating.
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
61.0
(200)
30.5
(100)
61.0
(200)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
61.0
(200)
30.5
(100)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
se 1204-TFB2
0 T
Use
No phase paper or misplaced phase paper, lower quality insulation systems, corona inception voltages between 850 and 1000 volts.
Properly placed phase paper, medium quality insulation systems, corona inception voltages between 1000 and 1200 volts.
These AC Variable Speed motors are “Power Matched” for use with Allen-Bradley Drives. Each motor is energy efficient and
designed to meet or exceed the requirements of the Federal Energy Act of 1992. All 1329R motors are optimized for variable speed
operation and include premium inverter grade insulation systems which meet or exceed NEMA MG1. Part 31.40.4.2.
Installation/Wiring
2–17
Table 2.F
Maximum Motor Cable Length Restrictions in meters (feet) – 500V-600V Drives 4
No External Devices
Motor
Dri e Dri
W
Drive
Drivee kW
Frame (HP)
A4
0.75 (1)
1.5 (2)
2.2 (3)
3.7 (5)
A
B
Any
Cable
Any
Cable
1600V or
1329R/L 6
Any
Cable
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
NR
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
1.2 (1.5)
NR
NR
0.75 (1)
NR
0.37 (0.5)
w/ 1204-TFA1 Terminator
Motor
A
B
Any
Cable
Any
Cable
1600V or
1329R/L
Any
Cable
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
2.2 (3)
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
1.5 (2)
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
0.75 (1)
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
0.37 (0.5)
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
3.7 (5)
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
2.2 (3)
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
1.5 (2)
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
0.75 (1)
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
0.37 (0.5)
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
NR
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
NR
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
A
B
otor kW
W
Motor
(HP)
0.75 (1)
Any
Cable
Any
Cable
NR
NR
0.37 (0.5)
NR
1.5 (2)
1329R/L
Motors 6
Any
Cable
w/ 1204-TFB2 Terminator
Motor
Reactor at Drive 2
Motor
A
B
Any
Cable
Any
Cable
1600V or
1329R/L
Any
Cable
Not
Recommended
B
5.5-15
(7.5-20)
5.5-15
(7.5-20)
NR
9.1
(30)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
5
NR
61.0
(200)
5
30.5
(100)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
C
18.5-45
(25-60)
18.5-45
(25-60)
NR
9.1
(30)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
5
NR
61.0
(200)
5
30.5
(100)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
D
56-93
(75-125)
56-93
(75-125)
NR
9.1
(30)
182.9
(600))
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
5
NR
61.0
(200)
5
61.0
(200)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
E
112-224
(150-X300)
112-224
(150-X300)
NR
9.1
(30)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
5
NR
61.0
(200)
5
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
F
187-336
(250-450)
187-336
(250-450)
NR
9.1
(30)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
5
NR
61.0
(200)
5
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
G
224-448
(300-600)
224-448
(300-600)
NR
9.1
(30)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
5
NR
61.0
(200)
5
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
NR = Not Recommended
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Values shown are for 480V nominal input voltage and drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz. Consult factory regarding operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz.
Multiply values by 0.85 for high line conditions. For input voltages of 380, 400 or 415V AC, multiply the table values by 1.25, 1.20 or 1.15, respectively.
A 3% reactor reduces motor and cable stress but may cause a degradation of motor waveform quality. Reactors must have a turn–turn insulation rating of 2100
volts or higher.
Includes wire in conduit.
Values shown are for nominal input voltage and drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz. Consult factory regarding operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz. Multiply
values by 0.85 for high line conditions.
Information not available at time of printing.
These distances require new 1329R or 1329L motors. New motors at 600V are rated at approximately 1850V insulation value. These distances are only valid with
firmware version 4.03 or higher.
These distance restrictions are due to charging of cable capacitance and may vary from application to application. These distances are only valid with firmware
version 3.04 or higher.
2–18
Installation/Wiring
Figure 2.2
Terminal Block TB1
A1-A3 Frame
A4 Frame
200-240V, 0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 5.5-7.5 kW (7.5-10 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 0.75-3.7 kW (1-5 HP) Terminal Designations
GRD
GRD
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
U
(T1)
DC
–
V
(T2)
GRD
W
(T3)
Dynamic Brake
Option
To Motor
Required
Input Fusing
DC
+
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
DC
+
BRK 2
–
DC
–
COM
U
(T1)
To Motor
To Motor
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
Required
Input Fusing
V
(T2)
W
(T3)
To Motor
DC Input Line
1
1
GRD
1
1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
AC Input Line
Dynamic Brake
Important: A brake malfunction
will occur if the Dynamic Brake is
connected to "DC – COM"
B2 Frame
B1 Frame
200-240V, 7.5-11 kW (10-15 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 15-22 kW (20-30 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 15 kW (20 HP) Terminal Designations
200-240V, 5.5 kW (7.5 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480/500-600V, 5.5-11 kW (7.5-15 HP) Terminal Designations
PE
R
DC
DC
(L1)
–
+
Dynamic Brake
PE
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
U
(T1)
V
(T2)
W
(T3)
PE
To Motor
To Motor
PE
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
U
(T1)
V
(T2)
W
(T3)
Dynamic Brake
Required 1
Input Fusing
1 Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
DC
–
DC
+
To Motor
Required 1
Input Fusing
AC Input Line
To Motor
1 Required
Branch
Circuit Disconnect
200-240V, 15-22 kW (20-30 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 30-45 kW (40-60 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 18.5-45 kW (25-60 HP) Terminal Designations
AC Input Line
C Frame
PE
GRD
PE
GRD
DC
+
DC
–
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
U
(T1)
V
(T2)
W
(T3)
Dynamic Brake
Required 1
Input Fusing
To Motor
1
To Motor
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
1
2
AC Input Line
User supplied.
Terminal located separately on Series A Drives.
Installation/Wiring
2–19
200-240V, 30-45 kW (40-60 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 45-112 kW (60-150 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 56-112 kW (75-150 HP) Terminal Designations
D Frame
DC +
Brake
DC –
Brake
PE
PE
TE
To Motor
S
(L2)
R
(L1)
U
(T1)
T
(L3)
V
(T2)
W
(T3)
To Motor
1
1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
Required
Input Fusing
See Appendix B for detailed Dimensions.
AC Input Line
200-240V, 56-75 kW (75-100 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 112-187 kW (150-250 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 112-224 kW (150-300 HP) Terminal Designations
E Frame
TE
+DC
–DC
PE
PE
R-L1
BUS
S-L2
INPUT
T-L3
To Motor
See Appendix B for detailed Dimensions.
Required 1
Input Fusing
U-M1
V-M2
W-M3
OUTPUT
To Motor
1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
1
User supplied.
2–20
Installation/Wiring
380-480V, 187-336 kW (250-450 HP) Terminal Designations
F Frame
R-L1
PE
T-L3
S-L2
U-M1
W-M3
V-M2
Input Fusing
(Supplied)
To Motor
1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
typical terminal
DC –
Brake
DC +
Brake
380-480V, 224-448 kW (300-600 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 187-448 kW (250-600 HP) Terminal Designations
DC +
Brake
G Frame
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
R
(L1)
DC –
Brake
Required 1
Input Fusing
U
(M1)
1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
V
(M2)
W
(M3)
AC Input Line
Brake terminals are located
behind the "U" terminal.
Access terminals
from side of chassis
To Motor
R
S
T
typical terminal layout
(located at top of drive)
U
V
(located at bottom of drive)
W
1
User supplied.
Installation/Wiring
Control and Signal Wiring
2–21
Terminal Block TB2
TB2 is located at the bottom of the Main Control Board. 0.37-7.5
kW (0.5-10 HP) A Frame drives have 18 positions. Remaining frame
sizes from 5.5 kW (7.5 HP) and up have 22 positions. The maximum
and minimum wire size accepted by TB2 is 2.1 and 0.30 mm2 (14
and 22 AWG). Maximum torque for all terminals is 1.36 N-m (12
lb.-in.). Use Copper wire only. See Figures 2.1 and 2.3.
The recommended control signal wire is:
• Belden 8760 (or equiv.)–0.750 mm2 (18 AWG), twisted pair, shielded.
• Belden 8770 (or equiv.)–0.750 mm2 (18 AWG), 3 conductor, shielded.
• Belden 9460 (or equiv.)–0.750 mm2 (18 AWG), twisted pair, shielded.
Control Connections
If the drive control connections are to be linked to an electronic
circuit or device, the common or 0V line should, if possible, be
grounded at the device (source) end only.
Important:
Signal Common – User speed reference signals are terminated to logic common at TB2, terminal 3 or 4. This puts
the negative (or common) side of these signals at earth
ground potential. Control schemes must be examined for
possible conflicts with this type of grounding scheme.
Shield Termination – TE (True Earth)
The TE terminal block (not available on 0.37-7.5 kW (0.5-10 HP) A
Frame drives) provides a terminating point for signal wiring shields.
Refer to Figures 2.1 and 2.3 for location.
The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by this block is 2.1
and 0.30 mm2 (14 and 22 AWG). Maximum torque is 1.36 N-m (12
lb.-in.). Use Copper wire Only and always separate control and
power cabling.
Cable Routing
If unshielded cable is used, control signal circuits should not run
parallel to motor cables or unfiltered supply cables with a spacing
less than 0.3 meters (1 foot). Cable tray metal dividers or separate
conduit should be used.
Important:
When user installed control and signal wiring with an
insulation rating of less than 600V is used, this wiring
must be routed inside the drive enclosure such that it is
separated from any other wiring and uninsulated live parts.
2–22
Installation/Wiring
Figure 2.3
TB2 Connections
10 Bit
A/D
10 Bit
A/D
10 Bit
A/D
Typical
150
47.5k
1µf
52.3k
1µf
75k
TE
TE
2
1.4k
100
3
4
5
–
7
6
+
+
8
–
CR4 CR4
+
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Only Present
on B Frame
& Up Drives
A1
A2
+
Contacts Shown in Unpowered State
(or Powered State with Fault/Alarm Present)
4-20mA
10k Ohm
10
9
0-10V
to
TE
CR3 CR3
215
CR1 CR2
100
1
100
1µf
Logic
Common
Only Present
on B Frame
& Up Drives
12 Bit
D/A
215
3.42k
+5V
Pulse
Source
Reserved for
Future Use
Analog Out
User Supplied
Analog Device
Table 2.G
Terminal Block TB2 Specifications
Terminal
TE
1, 2, 3
4
5
6
7, 8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
Refer to the I/O Config group parameters for
analog scaling.
Refer to the [Maximum Speed] parameter on
page 5–45.
Refer to Chapter 6 for contact description.
Not available if Encoder Feedback option is
used.
Minimum Load Impedance:
A Frame drives = 3.5k ohms
B Frame drives & Up = 1.5k ohms.
Recommended load for all frames = 10k ohms.
Maximum Load Impedance:
A Frame drives = 260 ohms
B Frame drives & Up = 315 ohms
10, 11
11, 12
13, 14
14, 15
16, 17
17, 18
A1, A2
Signal
True Earth – Shield Termination
External Speed Pot. or Analog Trim Pot. (10k ohm pot. required) 2
Signal Common
0-10V DC Input 2
Input Impedance = 100k ohms
4-20mA Input 2
Input Impedance = 250 ohms
Pulse Input for Frequency Ref. 4 Refer to Pulse Input on the following page
Analog Output 1
Jumper JP1 to select 0-10V DC output 5
A Frame Drives
Jumper JP2 to select 0-20mA output 6
Analog Output 1
Jumper J5 selects output
B Frame Drives and Up
pins 1-2 = 0-20mA 6
pins 3-4 = 0-10V DC 5
CR1 Programmable Contact
CR2 Programmable Contact
Firmware Versions 4.01 & Up
CR2 Run Contact
Firmware Versions below 4.01
CR3 Programmable Contact
Resistive Rating = 115V AC/30V DC, 5.0A
Firmware Versions 4.01 & Up
I
Inductive
Rating = 115V AC/30V
V DC, 2.
2.0A
3
CR3 Fault & Fault NOT Contact
Firmware Versions below 4.01
CR4 Programmable Contact
Firmware Versions 4.01 & Up
CR4 Alarm & Alarm NOT Contact
Firmware Versions below 4.01
Reserved for Future Use
Installation/Wiring
2–23
Pulse Input
ATTENTION: If reverse polarity or voltage levels
are maintained above +12V DC, signals may be
degraded and component damage may result.
!
The pulse input signal must be an externally powered square-wave
pulse at a 5V TTL logic level. Circuits in the high state must
generate a voltage between 4.0 and 5.5V DC at 16 mA. Circuits in
the low state must generate a voltage between 0.0 and 0.4V DC.
Maximum input frequency is 125kHz. Scale factor [Pulse/Enc Scale]
must be set.
Important:
Control Interface Option –
TB3
Pulse inputs (TB2-7, 8) cannot be used if encoder inputs
(TB3, terminals 31-36) are being used.
The Control Interface Option provides a means of interfacing various
signals and commands to the 1336 PLUS by using contact closures.
Six different versions of the option are available:
L4
L4E
L5
L5E
L6
L6E
1
Contact Closure Interface 1
Contact Closure Interface 1 with Encoder Feedback Inputs
+24V AC/DC Interface
+24V AC/DC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs
115V AC Interface
115V AC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs
Uses internal +5V DC supply.
The user inputs are connected to the option board through TB3 (see
Figure 2.1 for location). The L4, L5 and L6 options each have nine
control inputs. The function of each input must be selected through
programming as explained later in this section. The L4E, L5E and
L6E options are similar to L4, L5 and L6 with the addition of
encoder feedback inputs. Refer to Figure 2.6 (a, b & c) for input
impedance values.
2–24
Installation/Wiring
Available Inputs
A variety of combinations made up of the following inputs are
available.
Input
1st/2nd Accel/Decel
Auxiliary
Digital Pot Up/Down
Enable
Integrator Reset
(NOT)
Local Control
PI Output
Reverse
Reverse or Forward
Run Forward/Reverse
Speed Select 1, 2, 3
Start
Stop Type
Stop/Fault Reset
Description
These inputs allow selection of the accel or decel time used by
the drive.
Required for Operation – this input is intended to fault the drive
via external devices (i.e. motor thermoswitch, O.L. relays, etc.).
Opening this contact will fault (F02 – Aux Fault) the drive and
shut the output off, ignoring the programmed stop mode.
These inputs increase (up) or decrease (down) the drive
commanded frequency when MOP (Motor Operated
Potentiometer) is chosen as the frequency command source.
The rate of increase/decrease is programmable.
Required for Operation – opening this input shuts the drive
output off, ignoring the programmed stop mode.
Opening this input clamps the process PI integrator value at
zero. Closing this input allows the integrator to continue to
operate.
Closing this input gives exclusive control of drive logic to the
inputs at terminal block TB3. No other devices may issue logic
commands (excluding Stop) to the drive.
Enables or disables the output of the PI regulator.
Available Only with three-wire control – In single source
reversing modes, closing this input commands reverse direction
and opening this input commands forward direction.
In multi-source reversing modes, closing these inputs commands
the corresponding direction. If both inputs are open or both are
closed, the current direction is maintained.
Available Only with two-wire control – Closing these inputs
issues both a start command and a direction command to the
drive. Opening these contacts issues a stop command to the
drive.
These inputs choose the frequency command source for the
drive. See following pages for details.
Issues a Start command for the drive to begin acceleration to
commanded frequency.
Closing this input selects the stop mode in [Stop Select 2] as the
method of stopping when a stop command is issued. Opening
this input selects the stop mode in [Stop Select 1] as the method
of stopping.
Issues a Stop command for the drive to cease output per the
programmed stop mode. If the drive has faulted, opening this
input resets the fault if [Fault Clear Mode] is enabled.
Installation/Wiring
2–25
The available combinations are shown in Figure 2.5. Programming
the [Input Mode] parameter to one of the Input Mode numbers listed,
will select that combination of input functions.
Important:
If a Control Interface Option is not installed, the [Input
Mode] parameter must be set to 1 (default) and jumpers
must be installed as shown in Figure 2.7. If the drive
was shipped from the factory without the option, these
jumpers will have been installed.
Important:
The [Input Mode] parameter can be changed at any
time, but the change will not affect drive operation until
power to the drive has been removed and bus voltage
has decayed completely. When changing the [Input
Mode] parameter, it is important to note that the
functions of the TB3 inputs will change when power is
reapplied to the drive.
The programming options of the Control Interface Option allow the
user to select an input combination to meet the needs of a specific
installation. Appropriate selection of a combination may be done by
using Figure 2.5. First determine the type of start/stop/direction
control desired. Then select the remaining control functions
available. Record the selected mode number below.
Selected Mode Number:
Figure 2.4 provides the terminal designations for TB3. The
maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB3 is 2.1 and 0.30
mm2 (14 and 22 AWG). Recommended torque for all terminals is
0.90-1.13 N-m (8-10 lb.-in.). See Figure 2.6 for TB3 interconnection
information. Use Copper wire only.
Figure 2.4
TB3 Terminal Designations
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Common
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Common
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Common
Enable
Encoder B
Encoder NOT A
Encoder NOT B
Encoder A
+12V (200mA max.)
Encoder Common
Input 1
20
Input 2 (Stop)
Included on L4E, L5E & L6E Only
19
2–26
Installation/Wiring
Speed Select/Frequency Reference
The drive speed command can be obtained from a number of
different sources. The source is determined by drive programming
and the condition of the Speed Select Inputs on TB3 (or reference
select bits of command word if PLC controlled – see Appendix A).
The default source for a command reference (all speed select inputs
open) is the selection programmed in [Freq Select 1]. If any of the
speed select inputs are closed, the drive will use other parameters as
the speed command source. Refer to Table 2.H and the examples that
follow.
Table 2.H
Speed Select Input State vs. Frequency Source
Speed Select 2
Speed Select 1
Speed Select 3
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Accessed through [Freq Select 2] parameter
Open
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Important:
Frequency Source
[Freq Select 1]
[Freq Select 2]
[Preset Freq 1]
[Preset Freq 2]
[Preset Freq 3]
[Preset Freq 4]
[Preset Freq 5]
[Preset Freq 6]
[Preset Freq 7]
The final speed command may be affected by the type
of modulation selected with [Speed Control], parameter
77. Refer to [Speed Control] in Chapter 5 for further
information.
Example 1
Input Mode 2 – Application calls for a local Human Interface
Module (HIM) speed command or remote 4-20mA from a PLC. The
drive is programmed as follows:
– [Freq Select 1] = Adapter 1
– [Freq Select 2] = 4-20mA
With Speed Select inputs 2 & 3 open and the selector switch set to
“Remote” (Speed Select 1 closed), the drive will follow [Freq Select
2] or 4-20mA. With the switch set to “Local” (Speed Select 1 open)
all speed select inputs are open and the drive will follow the local
HIM (Adapter 1) as selected with [Freq Select 1].
Remote
Local
26
Speed Select 3 (Open)
27
Speed Select 2 (Open)
28
Speed Select 1
Installation/Wiring
2–27
Example 2
Input Mode 7 – Application is to follow a local HIM unless a preset
speed is selected. The drive is programmed as follows:
–
–
–
–
–
[Freq Select 1] = Adapter 1
[Freq Select 2] = Preset Freq 1
[Preset Freq 1] = 10 Hz.
[Preset Freq 2] = 20 Hz.
[Preset Freq 3] = 30 Hz.
Contact operation for the speed select switch is described in the table
below. Since Input Mode 7 does not offer a Speed Select 3 input,
[Preset Freq 4-7] are not available.
Local 1 2
26
3
See Table
itch
Switch
Position
Local
1
2
3
27
Speed Select 2
28
Speed Select 1
Speed Select Input
1 (#28)
2 (#27)
Open
Open
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
r eter Used
se
Parameter
for Speed Ref.
[Freq Select 1]
[Freq Select 2]
[Preset Freq 2]
[Preset Freq 3]
ro r
e
Programmed
Setting
Adapter 1
Preset Freq 1
20 Hz.
30 Hz.
2–28
Installation/Wiring
Figure 2.5
Input Mode Selection & Typical TB3 Connections
Momentary
Maintained
See Figure 2.6 for Wiring Information
[Input Mode] 1
Factory Default
19
Status
20
Stop/Fault Reset 3
21
Common
22
Status
23
Status
24
Status
25
Common
26
Status
27
Status
28
Status
29
Common
30
Enable 3
Note: If this mode is selected, the status of all
inputs can be read at the [Input Status] parameter.
However, only “Stop/Fault Reset” and “Enable” will
have control function.
See Figure 2.6 for Wiring Information
ATTENTION: The JOG function will not operate properly
unless a SCANport option is connected to the drive. To assure
proper JOG function, install at least one of the following:
1201-HAP, 1201-HA1, 1201-HA2, 1336-GM1. Applies to
1305 with firmware FRN 2.01 or earlier and 1336 PLUS with
Language Module 1336S-EN firmware FRN 1.05 or earlier.
[Input Mode] 2-6, 17, 18, 22
Three-Wire Control with Single-Source Reversing
19
Start
20
Stop/Fault Reset 3
21
Common
2
23
Jog 7
24
Auxiliary
25
Common
3
Stop
Type
Speed Speed
Select 31 Select 31
26
27
Speed Select 2 1
28
Speed Select 1 1
30
Common
Enable
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
!
4
Mode
5
6
17 5
18 5
22 8
Reverse4 Reverse4 Reverse4 Reverse4 Reverse4 Reverse4 Integrator Integrator
Reset 6 Reset 6
22
29
3
Jog 7
Jog 7
Jog 7
2nd
Accel
Digital
Pot Up
PI
Output
2nd
Decel
Digital
Local Integrator Speed
Speed
Pot Dn Control2 Reset 6 Select 31 Select 31
See Speed Select Table.
Drive must be stopped to take Local Control. Control by all other
adapters is disabled (except Stop).
These inputs must be present before drive will start.
Bit 0 of [Direction Mask] must = 1 to allow TB3 direction change.
Firmware version 3.01 and Up, Only.
Inverted function – voltage resets integrator to zero.
7
See ATTENTION statement on this page.
8
Firmware version 4.01 and Up, Only.
Installation/Wiring
2–29
19
Start
20
Stop/Fault Reset 3
21
Common
22
23
24
Auxiliary 3
25
Common
7
27
9
Mode
10
Speed Select 1 1
29
Common
30
Enable 3
19 5
23 8
1st
Accel
Reverse4 Reverse4
Forward4 Forward4 Digital Forward4
Pot Dn
2nd
Accel
Forward4 Forward4
Speed Speed Digital
Select 31 Select 31 Pot Up
Speed Speed Speed Digital
Select 21 Select 21 Select 21 Pot Dn
28
11
Reverse4 Reverse4 Digital Reverse4
Pot Up
Jog 7
26
8
1st Integrator Integrator
Decel Reset 6 Reset 6
2nd
Decel
Speed
PI
Select 21 Output
!
See Figure 2.6 for Wiring Information
ATTENTION: The JOG function will not operate properly
unless a SCANport option is connected to the drive. To assure
proper JOG function, install at least one of the following:
1201-HAP, 1201-HA1, 1201-HA2, 1336-GM1. Applies to
1305 with firmware FRN 2.01 or earlier and 1336 PLUS with
Language Module 1336S-EN firmware FRN 1.05 or earlier.
[Input Mode] 7-11, 19, 23
Three-Wire Control with Multi-Source Reversing
[Input Mode] 12-16, 20, 21, 24
Two-Wire Control, Single-Source Control
See ATTENTION
statement below
!
19
Run Forward/Stop 4
20
Stop/Fault Reset 3
21
Momentary
Maintained
See Figure 2.6 for Wiring Information
22
Common
Run Reverse/Stop4
23
24
25
Local
Control2
Stop
Type
14
15
Mode
16
20 5
2nd Digital Local
Local
Accel Pot Up Control2 Control2
21 8
24 8
Jog 7
PI
Output
Common
Speed Speed 2nd Digital
Select 31 Select 31 Decel Pot Dn
27
Speed Select 2 1
28
Speed Select 1 1
30
13
Auxiliary 3
26
29
12
Common
Enable 3
!
Stop Integrator Speed Integrator
Type Reset 6 Select 31 Reset 6
Two wire control uses maintained Run contacts that act as
both Run (closed) and Stop (open) devices. Opening the Stop
contact (terminal 20) will stop the drive. If this contact is
reclosed, any fault will be reset. If a valid Start command is
still present, the drive will restart.
If a three wire device (i.e. HIM) is also used, pressing the HIM
Stop key will also stop the drive. Releasing the Stop key will
clear any faults that are present, but the drive will not restart
without cycling the Start contact.
2–30
Installation/Wiring
Figure 2.6 a
Option L4/L4E Wiring
Typical
0.1µf
0.1µf
10.7k
10.7k
100
Typical
681
Isolated
+5V
5V
JP4
470
0.1µf
12V
470
90.9
Isolated
Ground
A
IGND
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A
33
34
ENC
12V
35
ENC
RET
36
TB3
Contacts shown are general, refer to Figure 2.5 for
Input Mode selection and recommended contact types.
Option L4/L4E – Contact Closure Interface Board Requirements
Contacts must be capable of operating at 10 mA current levels
without signal degradation. Reed type input devices are
recommended.
The L4/L4E option is compatible with the following Allen-Bradley
PLC modules:
• 1771-OYL
• 1771-OZL
Installation/Wiring
2–31
Figure 2.6 b
Option L5/L5E Wiring
510
510
100
Typical
20k
Typical
0.22µf
681
5V
JP4
510
12V
1k
90.9
A
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A
33
34
ENC
12V
35
ENC
RET
36
TB3
Common
User Supplied
24V AC/DC
+24V
Contacts shown are general, refer to Figure 2.5 for
Input Mode selection and recommended contact types.
Option L5/L5E – 24V AC/DC Interface Board Requirements
Circuits used with Option L5/L5E must be capable of operating with
high = true logic.
DC external circuits in the low state must generate a voltage of no
more than 8V DC. Leakage current must be less than 1.5 mA into a
2.5k ohm load.
AC external circuits in the low state must generate a voltage of no
more than 10V AC. Leakage current must be less than 2.5 mA into a
2.5k ohm load.
Both AC and DC external circuits in the high state must generate a
voltage of +20 to +26 volts and source a current of approximately 10
mA for each input. The L5/L5E option is compatible with these
Allen-Bradley PLC modules:
•
•
•
•
1771-OB
1771-OBD
1771-OBN
1771-OQ
•
•
•
•
1771-OQ16
1771-OYL
1771-OZL
1771-OBB
• 1771-OB16
2–32
Installation/Wiring
Figure 2.6 c
Option L6/L6E Wiring
100
100
20k
Typical
0.15µf
100
Typical
0.22µf
0.33µf
681
5V
499k
JP4
12V
49
90.9
A
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A
33
34
ENC
12V
35
ENC
RET
36
TB3
Common
Fuse
115V AC
Fuse
User Supplied
115V AC
Contacts shown are general, refer to Figure 2.5 for
Input Mode selection and recommended contact types.
Option L6/L6E – 115V AC Interface Board Requirements
Circuits used with Option L6/L6E must be capable of operating with
high = true logic. In the low state, circuits must generate a voltage of
no more than 30V AC. Leakage current must be less than 10 mA into
a 6.5k ohm load. In the high state, circuits must generate a voltage of
90-115V AC ±10% and source a current of approximately 20 mA for
each input. The L6/L6E option is compatible with these
Allen-Bradley PLC modules:
• 1771-OW
• 1771-OWN
• 1771-OA
• 1771-OAD
Encoder Wiring
Encoders must be line driver type, quadrature or pulse, 5V DC or
8-15V DC output, single-ended or differential and capable of
supplying a minimum of 10mA per channel. Maximum input
frequency is 125 kHz. Encoder inputs (TB3, terminals 31-36) cannot
be used if Pulse Train inputs (TB2-7, 8) are being used.
Installation/Wiring
2–33
The interface board is jumper selectable to accept a 5V TTL or 12V
DC square-wave with a minimum high state voltage of 3.0V DC
(TTL) or 7.0V DC (12 volt encoder). Maximum low state voltage is
0.4V DC. Recommended wire – shielded, 0.750 mm2 (18 AWG),
305 m (1000 ft.) or less. Maximum input frequency is 125kHz. See
Encoder & Communications Cabling on page 2–9.
Figure 2.6 d
Encoder Signal Wiring
Single-Ended, Dual-Channel 1
31
32
33
34
35
Differential
36
31
32
33
34
35
36
A
B NOT
A NOT
to
Power Supply Common
(Terminal 36 or External)
TB3
B
A
B NOT
B
A NOT
TB3
to TE
to TE
Single-Ended
Encoder Output
Connections
1
Differential
Encoder Output
Connections
For Single-Ended, Single-Channel (pulse) applications, eliminate the B and B (NOT) connections.
Some encoders may label the "A" connection as "Signal."
Important:
Correct direction of motor rotation as determined
during start-up (see Chapter 4) may require that the
A or B channel wiring be reversed.
Figure 2.6 e
Encoder Power Wiring
Internal
31
32
33
34
External
35
36
31
32
33
34
35
36
TB3
+
Common
+12V DC
(200 mA)
TB3
Common
to TE
Encoder Power
Connections
using 12V DC Internal
(Drive) Power Source
Minimum On Volts = 7V DC
Minimum Current = 10mA
External
Power
Supply
to TE
Encoder Power
Connections using
External DC
Power Source
Minimum On Volts = 3V DC
Minimum Current = 10mA
Important: Control Interface Board jumpers JP3 & JP4 must be set for the voltage level of the encoder output.
2–34
Installation/Wiring
Output Devices
Drive Output Disconnection
!
ATTENTION: Any disconnecting means wired to
the drive output terminals U, V and W must be capable
of disabling the drive if opened during drive operation.
If opened during drive operation, the drive will
continue to produce output voltage between U, V, W.
An auxiliary contact must be used to simultaneously
disable the drive.
Common Mode Cores
Common Mode Cores will help reduce the common mode noise at
the drive output and guard against interference with other electrical
equipment (programmable controllers, sensors, analog circuits, etc.).
In addition, reducing the PWM carrier frequency will reduce the
effects and lower the risk of common mode noise interference. Refer
to the table below.
Table 2.I
1336 PLUS Common Mode Chokes
Catalog Number
1321-M001
1321-M009
1321-M048
1321-M180
1321-M670
Cable Termination
Used with . . .
Communications Cables, Analog
Signal Cables, etc.
All 1336 PLUS Drives Rated:
480V, 0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP)
All 1336 PLUS Drives Rated:
480V, 5.5-22 kW (7.5-30 HP)
600V, 5.5-30 kW (7.5-40 HP)
All 1336 PLUS Drives Rated:
480V, 30-112 kW (40-X150 HP)
600V, 37-93 kW (50-125 HP)
All 1336 PLUS Drives Rated:
480V, 112-448 kW (150-600 HP)
600V, 149-448 kW (200-600 HP)
Description
Open Style - Signal
Level
Open Style with
Terminal Block, 9A
Open Style, 48A
Open Style, 180A
Open Style, 670A
Optional Cable Terminator
Voltage doubling at motor terminals, known as reflected wave
phenomenon, standing wave or transmission line effect, can occur
when using drives with long motor cables.
Inverter duty motors with phase-to-phase insulation ratings of 1200
volts or higher should be used to minimize effects of reflected wave
on motor insulation life.
Installation/Wiring
2–35
Applications with non-inverter duty motors or any motor with
exceptionally long leads may require an output filter or cable
terminator. A filter or terminator will help limit reflection to the
motor, to levels which are less than the motor insulation rating.
Table 2.E lists the maximum recommended cable length for
unterminated cables, since the voltage doubling phenomenon occurs
at different lengths for different drive ratings. If your installation
requires longer motor cable lengths, a reactor or cable terminator is
recommended. Refer to Table 2.E for frequency, cable length and
voltage restrictions of 1204-TFA1 or 1204-TFB2 terminators.
Optional Output Reactor
Bulletin 1321 Reactors listed in the 1336 PLUS-3.0 Price Sheet can
be used for drive input and output. These reactors are specifically
constructed to accommodate IGBT inverter applications with
switching frequencies up to 20 kHz. They have a UL approved
dielectric strength of 4000 volts, opposed to a normal rating of 2500
volts. The first two and last two turns of each coil are triple insulated
to guard against insulation breakdown resulting from high dv/dt.
When using motor line reactors, it is recommended that the drive
PWM frequency be set to its lowest value to minimize losses in the
reactors.
Important:
Selecting/Verifying Fan
Voltage
By using an output reactor the effective motor voltage will
be lower because of the voltage drop across the reactor –
this may also mean a reduction of motor torque.
1336 PLUS drives, 45 kW (60 HP) and up that have cooling fans
utilize a transformer to match the input line voltage to the proper fan
voltage. If an input voltage other than the standard 240, 480 or 600V
AC is used, the transformer tap may have to be changed.
!
ATTENTION: To avoid a shock hazard, assure that
all power to the drive has been removed before
proceeding.
1. Ensure that all power has been removed to the drive.
2. Locate the transformer in the lower left corner of the drive
chassis. Note lead placement (tap being used).
3. Determine the correct tap from the following figure and verify.
4. If present tap is incorrect, remove the insulating sleeve from the
correct tap.
5. Remove the wire lead presently connected and place on the
selected tap. Replace the insulating sleeve on the unused tap.
2–36
Installation/Wiring
380-480V AC Input Voltage
200-240V AC Input Voltage
200 Volt Tap
(use for 200-220V)
500-600V AC Input Voltage
500 Volt Tap
(use for 500V)
380 Volt Tap
(use for 380-400V)
415 Volt Tap
(use for 415V)
Auxiliary Inputs – TB4,
TB6
575 Volt Tap
(use for 575-600V)
460 Volt Tap
(use for 460-480V)
240 Volt Tap
(use for 230-240V)
Terminal blocks TB4 and TB6 (B Frame drives & up) allow the
drive power supplies to be operated from an external voltage source.
Both terminal blocks are located on the Base Driver Board and are
accessible from the front of the drive. See Figure 2.1 for locations.
TB4 can be used to externally power the low voltage power supply,
allowing operation of drive control functions in the absence of bus
voltage. Applying proper voltage to TB4 (see Table 2.J) provides
+5V, ±15V and isolated 12V outputs for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Main Control Board (Control Interface Boards, RIO Board, etc.)
SCANportt (HIM, etc.)
Encoder(s)
ELMS
Precharge
Any DC fans in the drive
TB6 can be used to externally power the high voltage power supply
which provides inverter IGBT drive voltage and the low voltage
necessary to power the low voltage power supply. This allows
operation of the drive in the absence of bus voltage.
The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB4 is 2.1 and
0.06 mm2 (14 and 30 AWG). Wire sizes for TB6 are 5.3 and 0.06
mm2 (10 and 30 AWG). Use Copper wire Only with a minimum
temperature rating of 75° C. Maximum torque for both terminal
blocks is 0.57 N-m (5 lb.-in.).
Table 2.J
Power Supply Input Requirements 1
Terminal
Block
TB4
TB6
1
Drive Type
All
230V AC
380-480V AC
500-600V AC
Input Voltage
22-28V DC
200-375V DC
400-750V DC
400-925V DC
Average
Current
2.25A
0.50A
0.25A
0.25A
Peak
Current
5.00A
1.00A
0.50A
0.50A
The power source used to drive a power supply must be capable of providing the peak current at
startup. A “flat“ current or power limit is acceptable, but a foldback current limit may trip at startup,
never allowing the supply to start.
Installation/Wiring
Auxiliary Output – TB9
2–37
The 480V output terminal block (TB9) is only available on F Frame
Drives. This terminal block provides a three-phase, high voltage
connection from the load side of the AC input line fuses. Normally
this connection is used to power an external control transformer (user
supplied) or other auxiliary circuit. Refer to Figure 2.1 for location.
Important:
!
Depending on the circuitry connected, additional fusing
may be required.
ATTENTION: The installation of auxiliary circuits
must comply with the national codes and standards
(NEC, VDE, BSA, etc.) and local codes regarding wire
type, conductor sizes, branch circuit protection and
disconnect devices. Failure to do so may result in
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
The auxiliary circuit can be utilized to a maximum current capacity
of 8 amperes RMS.
The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB9 is 4.0 and
0.8 mm2 (12 and 18 AWG). Use Copper wire Only with a minimum
temperature rating of 75° C. Maximum torque is 0.90-1.81 N-m
(8-16 lb.-in.).
Interface Board
Installation and Removal
Important:
If the Control Interface Board is being installed, Main
Control Board jumpers at pins 3 & 4 and 17 & 18 of J4
(J7 on B Frame & up drives) must be removed and the
proper [Input Mode] selected. If this board is removed,
these jumpers must be reinstalled and the [Input Mode]
parameter must be programmed to “1.”
Figure 2.7
Jumper Locations
J4
LE
N-B
NG
RA
UA
DL
GE
LA
J7
LA
AL
MO
AL
DU
LE
EY
LE
N-B
NG
RA
UA
DL
GE
MO
DU
LE
EY
C
S
E
L
E
S
C
S
E
L
E
S
JO
G
JO
G
Frames1 A1 - A4
1 Refer to page 1–1 for frame reference classifications.
Frames1 B - G
2–38
Installation/Wiring
Adapter Definitions
Serial communication devices such as the Human Interface Module
that are connected to the drive are identified by SCANport serial
communications as Adapters. Depending on the drive and options
ordered, a number of different adapters are available as shown in
Figure 2.8. Figure 2.9 shows the maximum distance allowed between
devices.
Figure 2.8
Adapter Locations
1203-SG2
1203-SG4
2
2
3
3
4
5
Internal Communication
(Adapter 6)
Expansion Options 2
Control Interface Option
(TB3 Adapter 0)
E
G
A
U
G
N
LA
Main
Control Board
LE
U
D
O
M
Y
LE
D
A
R
-B
N
E
LL
A
E
G
A
U
G
N
LA
LE
U
D
O
M
Y
LE
D
A
R
-B
N
E
LL
A
C
S
E
L
E
S
C
S
E
L
E
S
G
JO
G
JO
Main
Control Board
Drive Mounted HIM
(Adapter 1)
Drive Mounted HIM
(Adapter 1)
Frames1 A1 - A4
1
2
Frames1 B - G
Refer to page 1–1 for frame reference classifications.
Communications Port for remote HIM/communication options (Adapter 2) or Expansion Options (Adapters 2, 3, 4, 5) is located on the bottom of the enclosure
(bottom of Main Control Board Mounting Plate for frames F-G).
Figure 2.9
Remote Device Distances
RIO
ESC
SEL
JOG
HIM or Other
Remote Device
SCANport
Comm
Status
120/240V AC
Input
Communication Module
ESC
SEL
JOG
Cable Length in
Meters = 10 – X
Length = X Meters
Adapter 2
Cable Length in
Meters = 10 – X
Port Expansion
Option
(1203-SG2)
or
Total cable distance between
each device and drive must
be 10 meters (33 feet) or less.
Maximum Cable
Length = 10 Meters
ESC
SEL
JOG
HIM or Other
Remote Device
Chapter
3
Human Interface Module
Chapter 3 describes the various controls and indicators found on the
optional Human Interface Module (HIM). The material presented in
this chapter must be understood to perform the start-up procedure in
Chapter 4.
HIM Description
When the drive mounted HIM is supplied, it will be connected as
Adapter 1 (see Adapter Definitions in Chapter 2) and visible from
the front of the drive. The HIM can be divided into two sections;
Display Panel and Control Panel. The Display Panel provides a
means of programming the drive and viewing the various operating
parameters. The Control Panel allows different drive functions to be
controlled. Refer to Figure 3.1 and the sections that follow for a
description of the panels.
!
ATTENTION: When a drive mounted HIM is not
supplied on enclosed NEMA Type 1 (IP 20) drives, the
blank cover plate (option HAB) must be installed to
close the opening in the front cover of the enclosure.
Failure to install the blank cover plate allows access to
electrically live parts which may result in personal
injury and/or equipment damage.
When a drive mounted HIM is supplied with enclosed
NEMA Type 1 (IP 20) drives, but has been removed
from its mounting cradle for remote operation, the blank
cover plate must be installed in place of the HIM.
Important:
The operation of some HIM functions will depend upon
drive parameter settings. The default parameter values
allow full HIM functionality.
Figure 3.1
Human Interface Module
Display Panel
Control Panel
Human Interface Module
(HIM)
3–2
Human Interface Module
Figure 3.2
HIM Display Panel
LCD Display
Display Panel Key Descriptions
Escape
When pressed, the ESCape key will cause the
programming system to go back one level in the menu
tree.
Select
Pressing the SELect key alternately causes the top or
bottom line of the display to become active. The flashing
first character indicates which line is active.
Increment/Decrement
These keys are used to increment and
decrement a value or scroll through different
groups or parameters. Pressing both keys
simultaneously while the Process or Password
Display is shown, will save that display as the
startup display.
Enter
When pressed, a group or parameter will be selected or a
parameter value will be entered into memory. After a
parameter has been entered into memory, the top line of
the display will automatically become active, allowing
another parameter (or group) to be chosen.
Human Interface Module
3–3
Figure 3.3
HIM Control Panel
Digital Speed
Control and
Indicator
(also available
with Analog
Speed Pot.)
Control Panel Key Descriptions
Start
The Start key will initiate drive operation if no other
control devices are sending a Stop command. This key
can be disabled by the [Logic Mask] or [Start Mask].
Stop
If the drive is running, pressing the Stop key will cause
the drive to stop, using the selected stop mode. Refer to
the [Stop Select 1] and [Stop Select 2] parameters in
Chapter 5.
If the drive has stopped due to a fault, pressing this key
will clear the fault and reset the drive. Refer to the
[Flt Clear Mode], [Logic Mask] and [Fault Mask]
parameters.
Jog
When pressed, jog will be initiated at the frequency set
by the [Jog Frequency] parameter, if no other control
devices are sending a Stop command. Releasing the key
will cause the drive to stop, using the selected stop mode.
Refer to [Stop Select 1], [Stop Select 2], [Logic Mask]
and [Jog Mask].
3–4
Human Interface Module
Control Panel Key Descriptions (Continued)
Change Direction
Pressing this key will cause the drive to ramp down to
zero Hertz and then ramp up to set speed in the opposite
direction. The appropriate Direction Indicator will
illuminate to indicate the direction of motor rotation.
Refer to [Logic Mask] and [Direction Mask].
Direction LEDs (Indicators)
The appropriate LED will illuminate continuously to
indicate the commanded direction of rotation. If the
second LED is flashing, the drive has been
commanded to change direction, but is still
decelerating.
Up/Down Arrows (only available with digital speed control)
Pressing these keys will increase or decrease the HIM
frequency command. An indication of this command will
be shown on the visual Speed Indicator. The drive will
run at this command if the HIM is the selected frequency
reference. See [Freq Select 1] and [Freq Select 2].
Pressing both keys simultaneously stores the current
HIM frequency command in HIM memory. Cycling
power or removing the HIM from the drive will set the
frequency command to the value stored in HIM memory.
If the Analog Speed Potentiometer option has been
ordered, the Up/Down keys and Speed Indicator will be
replaced by the pot.
Speed Indicator (only available with digital speed control)
Illuminates in steps to give an approximate visual
indication of the commanded speed.
If the Analog Speed Potentiometer option has been
ordered, the Up/Down keys and Speed Indicator will be
replaced by the pot.
HIM Operation
When power is first applied to the drive, the HIM will cycle through a
series of displays. These displays will show drive name, HIM ID
number and communication status. Upon completion, the Status
Display (see Figure 3.4) will be shown. This display shows the current
status of the drive (i.e. “Stopped,” “Running,” etc.) or any faults that
may be present (refer to Chapter 6 for fault information). On a Series
A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM (see back of HIM) the Status Display
can be replaced by the Process Display or Password Login menu. See
appropriate sections on the following pages for more information.
Human Interface Module
3–5
Figure 3.4
Status Display
From this display, pressing any one of the 5 Display Panel keys will
cause “Choose Mode” to be displayed. Pressing the Increment or
Decrement keys will allow different modes to be selected as
described below and shown in Figure 3.5. Refer to the pages that
follow for operation examples.
Display
When selected, the Display mode allows any of the parameters to be
viewed. However, parameter modifications are not allowed.
Process
The Process mode displays two user-selected parameters with text
and scaling programmed by the user. Refer to Chapter 5 for further
information.
Program
Program mode provides access to the complete listing of parameters
available for programming. Refer to Chapter 5 for further parameter
programming information.
EEProm
This mode allows all parameters to be reset to the factory default
settings. In addition, a Series B HIM will allow parameter
upload/download between the HIM and drive.
Search (Series A, version 3.0 or Series B HIM Only)
This mode will search for parameters that are not at their default values.
Control Status (Series A, version 3.0 or Series B HIM Only)
Permits the drive logic mask to be disabled/enabled allowing HIM
removal while drive power is applied. Disabling the logic mask with a
Series A HIM below version 3.0 can be accomplished with [Logic
Mask] as explained on page 3–15. This menu also provides access to a
fault queue which will list the last four faults that have occurred. “Trip”
displayed with a fault indicates the actual fault that tripped the drive. A
clear function clears the queue – it will not clear an active fault.
Password
The Password mode protects the drive parameters against programming changes by unauthorized personnel. When a password has been
assigned, access to the Program/EEProm modes and the Control
Logic/Clear Fault Queue menus can only be gained when the correct
password has been entered. The password can be any five digit number between 00000 and 65535. Refer to the example on page 3–13.
3–6
Human Interface Module
Figure 3.5
HIM Programming Steps
OPERATOR LEVEL
Power-Up &
Status Display
ESC
or
SEL
or
or
or
"Choose Mode"
MODE LEVEL
Display
Process
(Read Only)
Program
EEPROM
(Read/Write)
Process Display
Search 1
(Read Only)
Reset Defaults
Drive -> HIM 2
HIM -> Drive 2
Recall Values 3
Save Values 3
Control
Status 1
Password
Control Logic,
Fault Queue
Login, Logout
Modify
GROUP LEVEL
Parameter Groups
(See Chapter 5)
PARAMETER LEVEL
Parameters
(See Chapter 5)
1
2
Series A (Version 3.0) and Series B HIM Only.
Series B HIM Only.
3
Reserved for Future Use.
Human Interface Module
Program and Display Modes
1. The Display and Program modes allow
access to the parameters for viewing or
programming.
A. From the Status Display, press Enter
(or any key). “Choose Mode” will be
shown.
or
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key to show “Program” (or “Display”).
Choose Mode
Display
Choose Mode
Program
C. Press Enter.
or
D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key
until the desired group is displayed.
Choose Group
Metering
E. Press Enter.
or
Bit ENUMs
or
F. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key to scroll to the desired parameter.
Output Current
0.00 Amps
With drive software versions above 2.00
and a Series A (software version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, bit ENUMs (16 character
text strings) will be displayed to aid
interpretation of bit parameters.
G. Select a bit parameter with the Increment (or Decrement) keys.
H. Press the SELect key to view the
ENUM of the first bit. Pressing this
key again will move the cursor to the
left one bit.
A blinking underline cursor will indicate that you are in the Display mode or
that a Read Only parameter as been
accessed. A flashing character will
indicate that the value can be changed.
Individual bits of a Read/Write parameter can be changed in the same manner.
Pressing the SELect key will move the
cursor (flashing character) one bit to the
left. That bit can then be be changed by
pressing the Increment/Decrement keys.
When the cursor is in the far right
position, pressing the Increment/Decrement keys will increment or decrement
the entire value.
Masks
Logic Mask
TB3
X1111111
3–7
3–8
Human Interface Module
Process Mode
or
1. When selected, the Process mode will
show a custom display consisting of
information programmed with the Process
Display group of parameters.
A. Follow steps A-C on the preceding
page to access the Program mode.
Choose Mode
Program
B. Press the Increment/Decrement key
until “Process Display” is shown.
Press Enter.
Choose Group
Process Display
C. Using the Increment/Decrement keys,
select [Process 1 Par] and enter the
number of the parameter you wish to
monitor. Press Enter.
or
D. Select [Process 1 Scale] using the
Increment/Decrement keys. Enter the
desired scaling factor. Press Enter.
or
E. Select [Process 1 Txt 1] using the
Increment/Decrement keys. Enter the
desired text character. Press Enter and
repeat for the remaining characters.
or
Process 1 Par
1
Process 1 Scale
1.00
Process 1 Txt 1
V
F. If desired, a second display line can
also be programmed by repeating steps
A-E for [Process 2 xxx] parameters.
or
or
and
G. When process programming is complete, press ESCape until “Choose
Mode” is displayed. Press Increment/
Decrement until “Process” is displayed.
H. Press Enter. This selects which custom
display will be on line 1 and line 2.
Use the Increment/Decrement keys to
select process 1 or 2 parameters for
line 1.
I. Press SELect to move to line 2. Select
the desired process parameters. With a
Series A (version 3.0) or a Series B
HIM, a zero can be entered to disable
line 2. In addition, the Process Display
can be set to appear when drive power
is applied by simultaneously pressing
the Increment and Decrement keys
while the Process Display active.
Choose Mode
Process
Process Var 1=1
Process Var 2=2
Sets Process Display
as Power-Up Display
Human Interface Module
EEProm Mode
The EEProm mode is used to restore all
settings to factory default values or upload/
download parameters between the HIM and
drive (Series B HIM, Only).
Reset Defaults
1. To restore factory defaults:
A. From the Status Display, press Enter
(or any key). “Choose Mode” will be
displayed.
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “EEProm” is displayed. If
EEProm is not in the menu, programming is password protected. Refer to
Password Mode later in this section.
or
Choose Mode
Display
Choose Mode
EEProm
C. Press Enter.
D. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “Reset Defaults” is displayed.
or
EEProm
Reset Defaults
E. Press Enter to restore all parameters to
their original factory settings.
F. Press ESC. “Reprogram Fault” will
display.
G. Press the Stop key to reset the fault.
Drive –> HIM
Important: If [Input Mode] was previously set to a value other than “1,”
cycle drive power to reset.
2. To upload a parameter profile from the
drive to the HIM, you must have a Series
B HIM.
A. From the EEProm menu (see steps
A-C above), press the Increment/
Decrement keys until “Drive –> HIM”
is displayed.
or
or
B. Press Enter. A profile name (up to 14
characters) will be displayed on line 2
of the HIM. This name can be changed
or a new name entered. Use the SEL
key to move the cursor left. The
Increment/Decrement keys will change
the character.
Reprogram Fault
F 48
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
EEProm
Drive –> HIM
Drive –> HIM
1 A
3–9
3–10
Human Interface Module
Drive –> HIM (continued)
C. Press Enter. An informational display
will be shown, indicating the drive
type and firmware version.
D. Press Enter to start the upload. The
parameter number currently being
uploaded will be displayed on line 1 of
the HIM. Line 2 will indicate total
progress. Press ESC to stop the upload.
HIM –> Drive
E. “COMPLETE” displayed on line 2
will indicate a successful upload. Press
Enter. If “ERROR” is displayed, see
Chapter 6.
3. To download a parameter profile from the
HIM to a drive, you must have a Series B
HIM.
Master Type
Version 2.01
Drive –> HIM 60
|||||
Drive –> HIM 210
COMPLETE
Important: The download function will
only be available when there is a valid
profile stored in the HIM.
or
or
A. From the EEProm menu (see steps
1A-1C), press the Increment/Decrement keys until “HIM –> Drive” is
displayed.
B. Press the Enter key. A profile name
will be displayed on line 2 of the HIM.
Pressing the Increment/Decrement
keys will scroll the display to a second
profile (if available).
C. Once the desired profile name is
displayed, press the Enter key. An
informational display will be shown,
indicating the version numbers of the
profile and drive.
D. Press Enter to start the download. The
parameter number currently being
downloaded will be displayed on line 1
of the HIM. Line 2 will indicate total
progress. Press ESC to stop the
download.
E. A successful download will be indicated by “COMPLETE” displayed on
line 2 of the HIM. Press Enter. If
“ERROR” is displayed, see Chapter 6.
EEprom
HIM –> Drive
HIM –> Drive
1 A
Master Type
2.01 –> 2.03
HIM –> Drive 60
|||||
Drive –> HIM 210
COMPLETE
Human Interface Module
Search Mode
1. The Search Mode is only available with a
Series A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM.
This mode allows you to search through
the parameter list and display all parameters that are not at the factory default
values.
A. From the Status Display, press Enter
(or any key). “Choose Mode” will be
shown.
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “Search” is displayed.
or
Choose Mode
Display
Choose Mode
Search
C. Press Enter. The HIM will search
through all parameters and display any
parameters that are not at their factory
default values.
or
D. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key to scroll through the list.
Control Status Mode
1. The Control Status mode is only available
with a Series A (version 3.0) or Series B
HIM.
This mode allows the drive logic mask to
be disabled, thus preventing a Serial Fault
when the HIM is removed with drive
power applied. The logic mask can be
disabled with Series A HIM versions
below 3.0 by using [Logic Mask] as
explained on page 3–15.
or
or
or
A. From the Status Display, press Enter
(or any key). “Choose Mode” will be
shown.
Choose Mode
Display
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “Control Status” is displayed.
Press Enter.
Choose Mode
Control Status
C. Select “Control Logic” using the
Increment/Decrement keys. Press
Enter.
Control Status
Control Logic
D. Press the SELect key, then use the
Increment (or Decrement) key to select
“Disabled” (or “Enable”).
Control Logic
Disabled
E. Press Enter. The logic mask is now
disabled (or enabled).
3–11
3–12
Human Interface Module
Control Status Mode
(continued)
2. This menu provides a means to view the
fault queue and clear it when desired.
Fault Queue/Clear Faults
A. From the Control Status menu, press
the Increment (or Decrement) key until
“Fault Queue” is displayed.
or
Control Status
Fault Queue
B. Press Enter.
C. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “View Faults” is displayed.
or
D. Press Enter. The fault queue will be
displayed. “Trip” displayed with a
fault will indicate the fault that tripped
the drive.
E. Use the Increment (or Decrement) key
to scroll through the list.
or
or
F. To clear the fault queue, press ESCape.
Then use the Increment/Decrement
keys to select “Clear Queue.” Press
Enter. Please note that “Clear Queue”
will not clear active faults.
Fault Queue
View Faults
Serial Fault
F
10
Trip 1
Reprogram Fault
F
48
2
Fault Queue
Clear Queue
Human Interface Module
Password Mode
or
1. The factory default password is 0 (which
disables password protection). To change
the password and enable password
protection, perform the following steps.
A. From the Status Display, press Enter
(or any key). “Choose Mode” will be
shown.
Choose Mode
Display
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “Password” is displayed.
Choose Mode
Password
C. Press Enter.
or
or
or
and
D. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “Modify” is displayed.
Password
Modify
E. Press Enter. “Enter Password” will be
displayed.
Enter Password
<
0>
F. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key to scroll to your desired new
password. With a Series A (version
3.0) or Series B HIM, the SELect key
will move the cursor.
Enter Password
< 123>
G. Press Enter to save your new password.
Choose Mode
Password
H. Press Enter again to return to the
Password Mode.
Password
Login
I. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “Logout” is displayed.
Password
Logout
J. Press Enter to log out of the Password
mode.
Choose Mode
Password
K. With a Series A (version 3.0) or Series
B HIM, the Password mode can be
programmed to appear when drive
power is applied. Simultaneously press
the Increment and Decrement keys
while the Password display is shown.
Sets Password Display
as Power-Up Display
3–13
3–14
Human Interface Module
Password Mode
(continued)
Login to the Drive
or
2. The Program/EEProm modes and the
Control Logic/Clear Queue menus are now
password protected and will not appear in
the menu. To access these modes, perform
the following steps.
A. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “Password” is displayed.
B. Press Enter. “Login” will be displayed.
C. Press Enter, “Enter Password” will be
displayed.
or
Logout from the Drive
or
Password
Login
Enter Password
<
0>
D. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until your correct password is
displayed. With a Series A (version
3.0) or Series B HIM, the SELect key
will move the cursor.
Enter Password
< 123>
E. Press Enter.
Choose Mode
Password
F. The Program and EEProm modes will
now be accessible. To prevent future
access to program changes, logout as
described in step 1.
3. To prevent unauthorized changes to
parameters, Logout must be performed as
described below.
A. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “Password” is displayed.
B. Press Enter.
or
Choose Mode
Password
Choose Mode
Password
Password
Login
C. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “Logout” is displayed.
Password
Logout
D. Press Enter to log out of the Password
mode.
Choose Mode
Password
Human Interface Module
Module Removal
3–15
For handheld operation, the module can be removed and located up
to 10 meters (33 feet) from the drive. Refer to Adapter Definitions in
Chapter 2 for details.
!
Important:
ATTENTION: Some voltages present behind the
drive front cover are at incoming line potential. To
avoid an electric shock hazard, use extreme caution
when removing/replacing the HIM.
Removing a HIM (or other SCANport device) from a
drive while power is applied will cause a “Serial Fault,”
unless the [Logic Mask] parameter has been set to
disable this fault or Control Logic (Control Status
menu) has been disabled (Series A, version 3.0 or
Series B HIM). Setting Bit 1 of the [Logic Mask]
parameter to “0” will disable “Serial Fault” from a HIM
on port 1. Note that this also disables all HIM control
functions except Stop.
To remove the module:
1. Assure that power has been removed, [Logic Mask] has been set
or Control Logic has been disabled.
2. Take the drive front cover off and simply slide the module down
and out of its cradle. Remove cable from module.
3. Connect the appropriate cable between the HIM and the
Communications Port (Adapter 2, 3, 4 or 5).
4. Reverse the above steps to replace the module. Apply power,
reset Bit 1 of the [Logic Mask] or enable Control Logic.
3–16
Human Interface Module
End of Chapter
Chapter
4
This chapter describes how you start-up the 1336 PLUS Drive.
Included are typical adjustments and checks to assure proper
operation. The information contained in previous chapters of this
manual must be read and understood before proceeding.
Important:
The 1336 PLUS is designed so that start-up is simple
and efficient. The programmable parameters are
grouped logically so that most start-ups can be
accomplished by adjusting parameters in only one
group. Advanced features and adjustments are grouped
separately. This eliminates having to constantly step
through unneeded parameters on initial start-up.
This start-up procedure covers only the most commonly adjusted
values.
Start-Up Procedure
The following start-up procedure is written for users who have a
Human Interface Module (HIM) installed and who are not using a
2-wire drive control scheme. For users without a HIM, respective
external commands and signals must be substituted to simulate their
operation.
!
ATTENTION: Power must be applied to the drive to
perform the following start-up procedure. Some of the
voltages present are at incoming line potential. To
avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment,
only qualified service personnel should perform the
following procedure. Thoroughly read and understand
the procedure before beginning. If an event does not
occur while performing this procedure, Do Not
Proceed. Remove Power by opening the branch
circuit disconnect device and correct the malfunction
before continuing.
Important:
• Power must be applied to the drive when viewing or changing
1336 PLUS parameters. Previous programming may affect the
drive status when power is applied.
• If the Control Interface option is installed, remote start circuits
may be connected to TB3 on the interface board. Confirm that all
circuits are in a de-energized state before applying power. User
supplied voltages may exist at TB3 even when power is not applied to the drive.
• Refer to Chapter 6 for fault code information.
4–2
Start-Up
Initial Operation – Motor Disconnected
1. Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the
rated value of the drive. If a Control Interface option (L4, L5, L6,
L4E, L5E, L6E) is installed, verify that the control power to this
board matches the board rating.
2. Remove and lock-out all incoming power to the drive including
incoming AC power to terminals R, S and T (L1, L2 and L3) plus
any separate control power for remote interface devices. Remove
the drive cover and disconnect the motor leads from TB1,
terminals U, V, W (T1, T2 and T3).
3. If a Control Interface option is installed, verify that the Stop and
Enable interlock inputs are present. If an [Input Mode] other than
“1” is to be used, verify that the Auxiliary interlock input is
present.
Important:
The Stop and Enable inputs (and Auxiliary if
required) must be present before the drive will
start.
If this option is not installed, verify that two jumpers are installed
at pins 3 & 4 and 17 & 18 of J4 on A Frame drives or J7 on B
Frame and up drives. In addition, the [Input Mode] must be set to
“1.”
4. Confirm that all other optional inputs are connected to the correct
terminals and are secure.
5. The remainder of this procedure requires that a HIM be installed.
If the HIM has a Control Panel, use the local controls to complete
the start-up procedure. If a Control Panel is not present, remote
devices must be used to operate the drive.
6. Replace the drive cover and tighten the thumbscrew(s).
Start-Up
Apply Power
7. Apply AC power and control voltages to
the drive. The LCD Display should light
and display a drive status of “Stopped” and
an output frequency of “+0.00 Hz.”
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
If the drive detects a fault, a brief statement relating to the fault will be shown on
the display. Record this information,
remove all power and correct the fault
source before proceeding. Refer to Chapter
6 for fault descriptions.
8. Important: The remaining steps in this
procedure are based on factory default
parameter settings. If the drive has been
previously operated, parameter settings
may have been changed and may not be
compatible with this start-up procedure or
application. Drive status and fault
conditions may be unpredictable when
power is first applied.
Reset Factory Defaults
To obtain proper results, the parameters
must be restored to factory default settings.
A. From the Status Display, press Enter
(or any key). “Choose Mode” will be
displayed.
or
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “EEPROM” is displayed. If
EEProm is not in the menu,
programming is password protected.
Refer to Chapter 3 for Password
information.
Choose Mode
Display
Choose Mode
EEProm
C. Press Enter.
or
D. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “Reset Defaults” is
displayed.
EEProm
Reset Defaults
E. Press Enter to restore all parameters to
their original factory settings.
Choose Mode
EEProm
F. Press ESC. “Reprogram Fault” will
display.
Reprogram Fault
F 48
G. Press the Stop key to reset the fault.
Important: If [Input Mode] was previously
set to a value other than “1,” cycle drive
power to reset.
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
4–3
4–4
Start-Up
Program Input Mode
9. If a Control Interface option is installed, it
is important that the Input Mode recorded
in Chapter 2 be programmed into the drive.
Since the control inputs to this option are
programmable, incorrect operation can
occur if an improper mode is selected. The
factory default input mode disables all
inputs except Stop and Enable. Verify your
control scheme against the information
provided in Chapter 2 and program the
[Input Mode] parameter as follows:
A. From the Status Display, press the
Enter key (or any key). “Choose
Mode” will be displayed.
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “Program” is displayed. If
Program is not available, programming
is password protected. Refer to
Chapter 3 for Password mode
information.
C. Press Enter.
D. Press the Increment key until “Setup”
is displayed.
E. Press Enter.
F. Press SELect. The first character of
line 2 will now flash.
or
G. Press the Increment or Decrement keys
until the correct mode is displayed,
then press Enter. The first character of
line 1 will now flash.
H. Press the ESCape key (3 times) to
return to the Status Display.
Cycle Input Power
I. Remove power to the drive. When the
HIM Display is no longer illuminated,
reapply power.
Important: Display must go blank for
programming change to take affect.
Choose Mode
EEProm
Choose Mode
Program
Metering
Setup
Input Mode
1
Input Mode
1
Input Mode
2
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
Start-Up
10. Set [Maximum Freq] and [Maximum
Voltage] parameters to correct values
(typically line voltage/frequency). Set
[Base Voltage] and [Base Frequency]
parameters to the motor nameplate values.
or
or
A. From the Status Display, press the
Enter key (or any key). “Choose
Mode” will be displayed.
Choose Mode
EEProm
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “Program” is displayed.
Choose Mode
Program
C. Press Enter.
Metering
D. Press the Increment key until “Setup”
is displayed.
Setup
E. Press Enter.
Input Mode
1
F. Press the Increment or Decrement keys
until “Maximum Freq” is displayed.
Press SELect. The first character of
line 2 will now flash.
Maximum Freq
60
G. Use the Increment/Decrement keys to
display the first digit, then press Enter.
Repeat for remaining digits.
H. Repeat the above steps to program the
remaining parameters. In firmware
versions 4.01 & up, the remaining
parameters are located in the Motor
Control group.
I. Press the ESCape key (3 times) to
return to the Status Display.
Choose
Sensorless Vector or V/Hz
11. Sensorless Vector or V/Hz operation.
Firmware Version 4.01 & Up Only
Sensorless Vector or Volts/Hertz operation
is selectable via [Control Select]. Vector
operation is the default. If V/Hz operation
is desired, reprogram [Control Select]
using the steps above as a programming
guide. Refer to page 5–51.
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
4–5
4–6
Start-Up
12. Setting Frequency Command.
A. From the Status Display, press the
Enter key (or any key). “Choose
Mode” will be displayed.
Choose Mode
Program
B. Press the Increment key until
“Display” is shown.
Choose Mode
Display
C. Press Enter.
Setup
D. Press the Decrement key until
“Metering” is displayed.
E. Press Enter.
F. Press the Increment key until “Freq
Command” is displayed.
or
Output Voltage
0 Vlts
Freq Command
+0.00 Hz
G. If the frequency command is a value
other than zero, use the speed source
(digital, analog pot, etc.) to set the
command to zero.
H. After the command has been set to
zero, press the ESCape key until the
Status Display is shown.
13. Verifying Minimum and Maximum
Frequency Settings.
A. Press the Start key. The drive should
output zero Hz. which is the factory
default value for the [Minimum Freq]
parameter. The Status Display should
indicate “At Speed” and the actual
frequency (+0.00 Hz.).
or
Metering
If the drive does not start, check bit 12
(Voltage Check) of the [Drive Alarm]
parameter. If the bit is “1,” the drive
terminal voltage is preventing the drive
from starting. Normally this is caused
by IGBT leakage current. To bypass
this alarm, program [Flying Start En] to
“Track Volts,” then start the drive.
B. With the drive still running, use the
speed source to command maximum
speed. The drive should ramp to
[Maximum Freq].
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
At Speed
+0.00 Hz
Accelerating
+29.62 Hz
At Speed
+60.00 Hz
Start-Up
14. Checking Direction.
A. Initiate a Reverse command.
Important: With [Direction Mask] set to the
default value, the reverse command must
be issued from the HIM or other adapter. If
the reverse command is to be issued from
TB3, [Direction Mask] must first be
programmed to allow direction control
from TB3.
The drive will ramp to zero speed, then
ramp to [Maximum Freq] in the opposite
direction. The output frequency shown on
the Display Panel will indicate speed with
a “+” for forward or a “–” for reverse. As
the drive decelerates, the Forward Direction LED will flash, indicating actual
direction. During this time the Reverse
Direction LED will illuminate continuously, indicating the commanded direction.
Once zero Hertz is reached and the drive
begins to accelerate in the reverse direction, the Forward LED will extinguish and
the Reverse LED will illuminate continuously.
At Speed
–60.00 Hz
15. If the Control Interface option is not
installed, stop the drive and go to step 16.
The following steps will check for correct
drive operation when the Enable and
Auxiliary inputs are removed.
Open Enable Signal
Restore Enable Signal
A. With the drive still running, open the
Enable signal. The drive should stop
and indicate “Not Enabled” on the
display. Restore the Enable signal.
Not Enabled
–0.00 Hz
B. If [Input Mode] is set to “1,” go to
step 16.
Open Auxiliary Signal
Restore Auxiliary Signal
C. With the drive running, open the
Auxiliary signal. The drive should stop
and the display will indicate
“Auxiliary Fault.” Restore the
Auxiliary signal and reset the drive by
pressing the Stop key.
Auxiliary Fault
F
2
Stopped
–0.00 Hz
4–7
4–8
Start-Up
16. Jog Control & Stop Mode Check.
Press & Hold Jog Key
Release Jog Key
A. With the drive reset, but not running,
press and hold the Jog key on the Control Panel. The motor should accelerate
to the frequency programmed by the
[Jog Frequency] parameter and remain
there until the Jog key is released.
When released, the drive should
execute a stop function using the programmed stop mode. Verify that the
correct stop mode was initiated.
At Speed
–10.00 Hz
Stopped
–0.00 Hz
17. Checking Accel and Decel Times.
Set to Maximum Frequency
A. Verify that the frequency command is
at maximum frequency.
B. Start the drive and observe the amount
of time the drive takes to accelerate to
maximum frequency. This should
equal 10 seconds, which is the factory
default value for the [Accel Time 1]
parameter.
C. Press the Reverse key and observe the
amount of time the drive takes to
decelerate from maximum frequency
to zero. This time should equal the
time set in the [Decel Time 1]
parameter (default is 10 seconds). If
these times are not correct for your
application, refer to Chapter 5 for
instructions on programming changes.
Important: With [Direction Mask] set to the
default value, the reverse command must
be issued from the HIM or other adapter. If
the reverse command is to be issued from
TB3, [Direction Mask] must first be
programmed to allow direction control
from TB3.
D. Stop the drive.
18. Reconnect the Motor.
Remove ALL Power
A. Remove and lock-out the input and
control power to the drive. When the
HIM Display is no longer illuminated,
remove the drive cover.
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
Start-Up
ATTENTION: To avoid a hazard
of electric shock, verify that the
voltage on the bus capacitors has
discharged. Measure the DC bus
voltage at the + & – terminals of
TB1. The voltage must be zero.
!
Reconnect Motor
B. Reconnect motor leads & replace cover.
19. Check for Correct Motor Rotation.
ATTENTION: In the following
steps, rotation of the motor in an
undesired direction can occur. To
guard against possible equipment
damage, it is recommended that the
motor be disconnected from the load
before proceeding.
A. Reapply power to the drive.
!
Apply Power to Drive
Verify Frequency Command = 0
Verify Forward Rotation
Slowly Increase Speed
or
Verify Direction of Rotation
B. Verify that the frequency command is
at zero Hz. For further information,
refer to step 12.
C. Using the Direction LEDs, verify that
forward direction is selected.
D. Start the drive and slowly increase the
speed until the motor begins to turn.
Note the direction of motor rotation. If
the direction of rotation is as desired,
proceed to Step E.
If the direction of motor rotation is
incorrect, stop the drive and remove all
power. When the HIM Display is no
longer illuminated, remove the drive
cover. Verify that the bus voltage
measured at “DC +” & “DC –” of TB1
is zero (see Attention above).
Interchange any two of the three motor
leads at TB1 – U, V or W. Repeat Steps
A through D.
E. If encoder feedback is being used,
verify that the polarity (“+” or “–”) of
[Pulse/Enc Hertz] equals the polarity
of the actual drive output as shown on
the Status Display. If the polarities are
the same, go to step F.
If polarities are different, stop the
drive, remove all power. Reverse the
“A” & “A NOT” OR “B” & “B NOT”
wiring. Repeat Steps A through D.
F. Stop the drive and replace drive cover.
At Speed
+5.00 Hz
Polarity
4–9
4–10
Start-Up
20. Low Speed Operation.
(Speed range greater than 20:1)
If Volts/Hertz operation was selected in
step 11, proceed to step 25.
Slip @ F.L.A. Adjustment.
To increase the steady state torque
performance of the motor at low speeds,
the default Speed Control method is Slip
Compensation. The factory default value
for [Slip @ F.L.A.] is “1.0 Hz.” Optimum
motor performance depends on accurate
setting of [Slip @ F.L.A.].
Estimate your motor slip value using the
following:
Motor Sync. RPM – Motor Rated RPM
Motor Sync. RPM
Example:
1800 – 1778
1800
Set Slip @ F.L.A. Value
or
x Motor Rated Freq. (Hz)
x 60 = 0.7 Hz Slip @ F.L.A.
This will provide a starting point for slip
compensation adjustment. If necessary,
further adjustment can be made while the
motor is under load.
A. From the Status Display, press the
Enter key (or any key). “Choose
Mode” will be displayed.
Choose Mode
EEProm
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key until “Program” is displayed.
Choose Mode
Program
C. Press Enter.
Metering
D. Press the Increment key until “Feature
Select” is displayed.
Feature Select
E. Press Enter.
Dwell Frequency
F. Press the Increment or Decrement keys
until “Slip @ F.L.A.” is displayed.
Press SELect. The first character of
line 2 will now flash.
Slip @ F.L.A.
G. Use the Increment/Decrement keys to
program the value calculated above,
then press Enter.
Slip @ F.L.A.
0.7 Hz
Start-Up
Speed Control Selection
4–11
No
Control
Slip
Comp.
Speed
Droop
Phase Lock
Loop *
Encoder
Feedback
[Speed Control]
Parameter 77
Droop +
Regulator
+
Speed
Adder
∑
Frequency Command
+
Speed
Reference
see page 2–26
P
Jump
Process
PI
* Firmware versions below 4.01 only.
Program NP Data
21. Tuning Sensorless Vector operation.
Firmware Version 4.01 & Up Only
To further improve drive performance in
Sensorless Vector mode, the actual motor
nameplate data can be entered directly.
Refer to the motor nameplate and program
the following Setup group parameters:
[Motor NP Amps]
[Motor NP Volts]
[Motor NP Hertz]
[Motor NP RPM].
For the typical steps involved when
programming, refer to step 20.
22. Optimum tuning requires motor rotation
and can be achieved by running the
drive/motor under a “no-load” condition.
Remove ALL Power to the Drive
Disconnect Load
Apply Power to Drive
or
A. Remove all power to the drive.
Disconnect the load from the system
by decoupling the motor shaft.
Reapply drive power.
B. While monitoring [Freq Command] in
the Metering group, adjust the speed
source for the drive (digital, analog
pot, etc.) to 45 Hz. continued
Freq Command
45 Hz
4–12
Start-Up
or
C. Press the Increment/Decrement keys
until “Flux Current” is displayed. Start
the drive and record this value. Stop
the drive.
Flux Current
1 Amp
Flux Current =
or
D. Press the Increment/Decrement keys to
display “Freq Command.” Adjust the
speed source for the drive to zero Hz.
Freq Command
0 Hz
or
E. Press the Increment (or Decrement)
key to display “Output Voltage.” Start
the drive and record the value.
Output Voltage
0 Vlts
F. Stop the drive.
Output Voltage at 0 Hz =
G. Program the values recorded above
into the following parameters.
[Flux Amps Ref] = [Flux Current] at 45 Hz.
[IR Drop Volts] = [Output Voltage] at zero Hz.
Adjusting Flux Up Time
Important: Some motors (i.e. 6 pole,
special, etc.) may be particularly sensitive
to the adjustment of [IR Drop Volts]. If this
tuning procedure does not give the desired
performance, adjust [IR Drop Volts]
up/down, 1 or 2 volts until desired
response is achieved.
23. On larger motors (37 kW/50 HP, typical)
additional acceleration performance can be
gained by adjusting [Flux Up Time]. This
parameter determines the amount of time
that the drive will inject current at [Current
Limit] levels before acceleration begins.
This pre-acceleration time builds flux in
the motor to allow for optimum
acceleration, and may result in shorter
overall acceleration. If better performance
is required, adjust [Flux Up Time]. Begin
with 0.2 seconds (default is zero) and
increase as necessary.
For the typical steps involved when
programming, refer to step 20.
Tuning [Slip Comp Gain]
24. To adjust the recovery response to load
changes [Slip Comp Gain] can be
increased. However, increasing the gain
value too high may cause system
instability. The factory default value is set
to minimum. Fine adjustment will require
operation with a load.
Slip Comp Gain
1
Amps
volts
Start-Up
Set Power-Up Display
or
Set Electronic Overload
25. With HIM software versions 2.02 & up,
the power-up display (Status, Process or
Password) can be programmed to appear
when drive power is applied. Simply
access the desired display and
simultaneously press the Increment and
Decrement keys.
26. Electronic overload protection is factory
set to drive maximum.
A. To properly set the electronic overload
protection, program [Overload Amps]
(Setup group) to the actual nameplate
F.L.A.
B. If the motor speed range is greater than
2:1, program [Overload Mode] to the
proper derate.
For the typical steps involved when
programming, refer to step 20.
27. This completes the basic start-up
procedure. Depending on your application,
further parameter programming may be
required. Refer to Chapter 5 for
information.
28. If password protection is enabled, log out
as described in Chapter 3.
4–13
4–14
Start-Up
End of Chapter
Chapter
5
Chapter 5 describes parameter information for the 1336 PLUS. Parameters are divided into 14 groups for ease of programming and
operator access. Grouping replaces a sequentially numbered parameter list with functional parameter groups that increases operator
efficiency and helps to reduce programming time. For most applications, this means simplicity at startup with minimum drive tuning.
Function Index
The Function Index shown below provides a directory of the
parameters required for each drive function. The Page Number
locates within a group all parameters associated with that specific
function.
Function
Analog Input Config
Auto Restart
Custom Volts-per-Hertz
DC Brake-to-Stop
DC Hold Brake
Dwell
Economize
Electronic Shear Pin
Encoder Feedback
Fault Buffer History
Frequency Select
I/O Configuration
Last Speed
Line Loss Recovery
Minimum/Maximum Frequency
Overload Protection
Preset Frequencies
Process Control
Process Display
Remote I/O
S-Curve Acceleration
Skip Frequencies
Slip Compensation
Stop Modes
Traverse Function
Programming Flow Chart
Page Number
5–15
5–22
5–51
5–17
5–17
5–21
5–51
5–29
5–45
5–29
5–19
5–26
5–19
5–24
5–11
5–12
5–19
5–47
5–44
5–43
5–23
5–20
5–22
5–16
5–25
The flow charts provided on pages 5–2 through 5–5 highlight the
steps required to access each group of parameters and lists all
parameters for each group.
Important:
Series A (Version 3.0) and Series B HIM software versions (see back of HIM) provide several new functions,
including; Search, Control Status and Bit ENUMs. Refer to Chapter 3 for a description of these functions.
5–2
Programming
OPERATOR LEVEL
Power-Up Mode &
Status Display
ESC
or
SEL
or
or
or
"Choose Mode"
MODE LEVEL
Display
(Read Only)
Process
Program
(Read and Write)
Parameter Groups
Process Display
Parameter Groups
GROUP LEVEL
Wraps to Linear List
Metering
Setup
Advanced
Setup
Frequency
Set
Feature
Select
I/O
Config
Faults
Diagnostics
page 5-7
page 5-10
page 5-14
page 5-19
page 5-21
page 5-26
page 5-29
page 5-34
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
PWM Frequency
Analog Trim En
4-20mA Loss Sel
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Stop Select 1
DC Hold Time
DC Hold Level
Hold Level Sel
Bus Limit En
Motor Type
Stop Select 2
KP Amps
Freq Select 1
Freq Select 2
Jog Frequency
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Skip Freq 1
Skip Freq 2
Skip Freq 3
Skip Freq Band
MOP Increment
Save MOP Ref
Freq Ref SqRoot
Pulse/Enc Scale
Dwell Frequency
Dwell Time
Speed Control
Slip @ F.L.A.
Slip Comp Gain
Run On Power Up
Reset/Run Tries
Reset/Run Time
S Curve Enable
S Curve Time
Language
Flying Start En
FStart Forward
FStart Reverse
LLoss Restart
Traverse Period
Max Traverse
P Jump
Input Mode
CR1 Out Select
CR2 Out Select
CR3 Out Select
CR4 Out Select
Dig Out Freq
Dig Out Current
Dig Out Torque
Set 0-10 Vlt Lo
Set 0-10 Vlt Hi
Set 4-20 mA Lo
Set 4-20 mA Hi
Analog Out Sel
Anlg Out Offset
Abs Analog Out
Set Anlg Out Lo
Set Anlg Out Hi
Fault Buffer 0
Fault Buffer 1
Fault Buffer 2
Fault Buffer 3
Clear Fault
Cur Lim Trip En
Shear Pin Fault
Motor OL Fault
Line Loss Fault
Blwn Fuse Flt
Low Bus Fault
Fault Data
Flt Motor Mode
Flt Power Mode
Fault Frequency
Flt Driv Status
Fault Alarms
Flt Clear Mode
Ground Warning
Drive Status
2nd Drive Sts
Drive Alarm
Latched Alarms
Input Status
Freq Source
Freq Command
Drive Direction
Stop Mode Used
Motor Mode
Power Mode
Output Pulses
Current Angle
Heatsink Temp
Set Defaults
DC Bus Memory
EEPROM Cksum
Output Current
Output Voltage
Output Power
DC Bus Voltage
Output Freq
Freq Command
4-20 mA Hertz
0-10 Volt Hertz
Pot Hertz
Pulse/Enc Hertz
MOP Hertz
Heatsink Temp
Power OL Count
Motor OL Count
Last Fault
Torque Current
Flux Current
% Output Power
% Output Curr
Input Mode
Freq Select 1
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Stop Select 1
Current Limit
Current Lmt Sel
Adaptive I Lim
Overload Mode
Overload Amps
VT Scaling
Motor NP RPM
Motor NP Hertz
Motor NP Volts
Motor NP Amps
PARAMETER LEVEL
Programming
5–3
FIRMWARE VERSIONS 4.01 & UP
EEPROM
Reset Defaults
Drive -> HIM 1
HIM -> Drive 1
Recall Values 2
Save Values 2
Series A (Version 3.0)
and Series B HIM Only
Series A (Version 3.0)
and Series B HIM Only
Search
(Read Only)
Control Status
Password
Control Logic
Fault Queue
Login, Logout,
Modify
1 Series B HIM Only.
2 Reserved for Future Use
Wraps to Linear List and Metering
Ratings
Masks
Owners
Adapter I/O
Process
Display
Encoder
Feedback
Process PI
page 5-38
page 5-39
page 5-41
page 5-43
page 5-44
page 5-45
page 5-47
Data In A1
Data In A2
Data In B1
Data In B2
Data In C1
Data In C2
Data In D1
Data In D2
Data Out A1
Data Out A2
Data Out B1
Data Out B2
Data Out C1
Data Out C2
Data Out D1
Data Out D2
Process 1 Par
Process 1 Scale
Process 1 Txt 1
Process 1 Txt 2
Process 1 Txt 3
Process 1 Txt 4
Process 1 Txt 5
Process 1 Txt 6
Process 1 Txt 7
Process 1 Txt 8
Process 2 Par
Process 2 Scale
Process 2 Txt 1
Process 2 Txt 2
Process 2 Txt 3
Process 2 Txt 4
Process 2 Txt 5
Process 2 Txt 6
Process 2 Txt 7
Process 2 Txt 8
Drive Type
Firmware Ver.
Drive Rtd Volts
Rated Amps
Rated kW
Rated CT Amps
Rated CT kW
Rated VT Amps
Rated VT kW
Direction Mask
Start Mask
Jog Mask
Reference Mask
Accel Mask
Decel Mask
Fault Mask
MOP Mask
Logic Mask
Local Mask
Alarm Mask
Stop Owner
Direction Owner
Start Owner
Jog Owner
Reference Owner
Accel Owner
Decel Owner
Fault Owner
MOP Owner
Local Owner
Note: Parameters that appear in more than one group are shown in Bold
Speed Control
Encoder Type
Pulse/Enc Scale
Maximum Speed
Motor Poles
Speed KI
Speed Error
Speed Integral
Speed Adder
Motor NP RPM
Motor NP Hertz
Pulse/Enc Hertz
Speed Control
PI Config
PI Status
PI Ref Select
PI Fdbk Select
PI Reference
PI Feedback
PI Error
PI Output
KI Process
KP Process
PI Neg Limit
PI Pos Limit
PI Preload
Motor
Control
page 5-51
Control Select
Flux Amps Ref
IR Drop Volts
Flux Up Time
Start Boost
Run Boost
Boost Slope
Break Voltage
Break Frequency
Base Voltage
Base Frequency
Maximum Voltage
5–4
Programming
OPERATOR LEVEL
Power-Up Mode &
Status Display
ESC
or
SEL
or
or
or
"Choose Mode"
MODE LEVEL
Display
(Read Only)
Process
Program
(Read and Write)
Parameter Groups
Process Display
Parameter Groups
GROUP LEVEL
Wraps to Linear List
Metering
Setup
Advanced
Setup
Frequency
Set
Feature
Select
Output
Config
Faults
Diagnostics
page 5-7
page 5-10
page 5-14
page 5-19
page 5-21
page 5-26
page 5-29
page 5-34
Input Mode
Freq Select 1
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Base Frequency
Base Voltage
Maximum Voltage
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Stop Select 1
Current Limit
Overload Mode
Overload Amps
VT Scaling
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Base Frequency
Base Voltage
Break Frequency
Break Voltage
Maximum Voltage
DC Boost Select
Start Boost
Run Boost
Run/Accel Boost 2.01
PWM Frequency
Analog Invert
Analog Trim En
4-20mA Loss Sel
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Stop Select 1
DC Hold Time
DC Hold Level
Bus Limit En
Motor Type
Stop Select 2
Ki Amps 2.03
Kp Amps 2.03
Freq Select 1
Freq Select 2
Jog Frequency
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Skip Freq 1
Skip Freq 2
Skip Freq 3
Skip Freq Band
MOP Increment
Pulse/Enc Scale
Dwell Frequency
Dwell Time
Slip @ F.L.A.
Run On Power Up
Reset/Run Tries
Reset/Run Time
S Curve Enable
S Curve Time
Language
Speed Control
Flying Start En
FStart Forward
FStart Reverse
Traverse Period
Max Traverse
P Jump
Digital Out Sel
Dig Out Freq
Dig Out Current
Dig Out Torque
Analog Out Sel
Anlg Out Offset
Output Current
Output Voltage
Output Power
DC Bus Voltage
Output Freq
Freq Command
4-20 mA Hertz
0-10 Volt Hertz
Pot Hertz
Pulse/Enc Hertz
MOP Hertz
Heatsink Temp
Last Fault
Torque Current
Flux Current
% Output Power
% Output Curr
PARAMETER LEVEL
Fault Buffer 0
Fault Buffer 1
Fault Buffer 2
Fault Buffer 3
Clear Fault
Cur Lim Trip En
Line Loss Fault
Blwn Fuse Flt
Low Bus Fault
Flt Motor Mode
Flt Power Mode
Fault Frequency
Flt Driv Status
Fault Alarms
Flt Clear Mode
Ground Warning 2.01
Drive Status
Drive Alarm
Latched Alarms 2.01
Input Status
Freq Source
Freq Command
Drive Direction
Stop Mode Used
Motor Mode
Power Mode
Output Pulses
Current Angle
Heatsink Temp
Set Defaults
DC Bus Memory 2.03
Programming
5–5
FIRMWARE VERSIONS 1.05 – 3.01
EEPROM
Reset Defaults
Drive -> HIM 1
HIM -> Drive 1
Recall Values 2
Save Values 2
Series A (Version 3.0)
and Series B HIM Only
Series A (Version 3.0)
and Series B HIM Only
Search
(Read Only)
Control Status
Password
Control Logic
Fault Queue
Login, Logout,
Modify
1 Series B HIM Only.
2 Reserved for Future Use
Wraps to Metering
Ratings 2.01
Masks
Owners
Adapter I/O
Process
Display
Encoder
Feedback
Process PI 3.01
page 5-38
page 5-39
page 5-41
page 5-43
page 5-44
page 5-45
page 5-47
Drive Type ➀
Firmware Ver. ➀
Drive Rtd Volts ➀
Rated Amps ➀
Rated kW ➀
Rated CT Amps ➀
Rated CT kW ➀
Rated VT Amps ➀
Rated VT kW ➀
Direction Mask
Start Mask
Jog Mask
Reference Mask
Accel Mask
Decel Mask
Fault Mask
MOP Mask
Logic Mask
Local Mask
Alarm Mask 2.01
Data In A1
Data In A2
Data In B1
Data In B2
Data In C1
Data In C2
Data In D1
Data In D2
Data Out A1
Data Out A2
Data Out B1
Data Out B2
Data Out C1
Data Out C2
Data Out D1
Data Out D2
Process 1 Par
Process 1 Scale
Process 1 Txt 1
Process 1 Txt 2
Process 1 Txt 3
Process 1 Txt 4
Process 1 Txt 5
Process 1 Txt 6
Process 1 Txt 7
Process 1 Txt 8
Process 2 Par
Process 2 Scale
Process 2 Txt 1
Process 2 Txt 2
Process 2 Txt 3
Process 2 Txt 4
Process 2 Txt 5
Process 2 Txt 6
Process 2 Txt 7
Process 2 Txt 8
Stop Owner
Direction Owner
Start Owner
Jog Owner
Reference Owner
Accel Owner
Decel Owner
Fault Owner
MOP Owner
Local Owner
Firmware version 2.01 or later.
Firmware version 2.03 or later.
3.01 Firmware version 3.01 or later.
➀ Located in the "Diagnostics" group for firmware versions before 2.01.
2.01
2.03
Note: Parameters that appear in more than one group are shown in Bold
Speed Control
Encoder Type
Pulse/Enc Scale
Maximum Speed
Motor Poles
Speed KI
Speed Error
Speed Integral
Speed Adder
Motor NP RPM
Motor NP Hertz
Pulse/Enc Hertz 2.01
PI Config
PI Ref Select
PI Fdbk Select
PI Reference
PI Feedback
PI Error
PI Output
Ki Process
Kp Process
PI Neg Limit
PI Pos Limit
Linear List
5–6
Programming
Chapter Conventions
Parameter descriptions adhere to the following conventions.
1. All parameters required for any given drive function will be
contained within a group, eliminating the need to change groups
to complete a function.
2. All parameters are documented as either having ENUMS or
Engineering Units.
ENUMS
[Parameter Name]
Parameter description.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
➀
➁
➂
#
Read Only or Read/Write
Drive Factory Setting
Display / Drive
ENUM Text / Internal Drive Units
➃ / ➄
Engineering Units
[Parameter Name]
Parameter description.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
➀
➁
➃, ➄
➂
➅
➆
#
Read Only or Read/Write
User Units / Internal Drive Units
Drive Factory Setting
Min Value Acceptable
Max Value Acceptable
➀ Parameter Number
Each parameter is assigned a number. The number can be used
for process display setup, fault buffer interpretation or serial
communication.
➁ Parameter Type
2 types of parameters are available:
Read Only
The value is changed only by the drive and is
used to monitor values.
Read/Write
The value is changed through programming. This
type can also be used to monitor a value.
➂ Factory Default
This is the value assigned to each parameter at the factory.
➃ Display Units
The units that appear on the HIM display. 2 types exist:
ENUMS
A language statement pertaining to the selection
made or language description of bit function.
Engineering
Standard units such as; Hz, sec, volts, etc.
➄ Drive Units
These are internal units used to communicate through the serial
port, and to scale values properly when reading or writing to the
drive.
➅ Minimum Value
This is the lowest setting possible for parameters that do not use
ENUMS.
➆ Maximum Value
This is the highest setting possible for parameters that do not use
ENUMS.
3. To help differentiate parameter names and display text from other
text in this manual, the following conventions will be used:
• Parameter Names will appear in [brackets]
• Display Text will appear in “quotes”.
Programming
Metering
[Output Current]
This parameter displays the output current present
at TB1, terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
[Output Voltage]
This parameter displays the output voltage present
at TB1, terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
[Output Power]
This parameter displays the output power present at
TB1, terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
[DC Bus Voltage]
This parameter displays the DC bus voltage level.
[Output Freq]
This parameter displays the output frequency
present at TB1, terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
[Freq Command]
This parameter displays the frequency that the drive
is commanded to output. This command may come
from any one of the frequency sources selected by
[Freq Select 1] or [Freq Select 2].
5–7
This group of parameters consists of commonly viewed drive operating conditions such as
motor speed, drive output voltage, current and command frequency. All parameters in this
group are Read Only and can only be viewed.
Parameter Number
54
Parameter Type
Read Only
Display Units / Drive Units
0.1 Amp / 4096 = Rated Amps
Factory Default
None
Minimum Value
0.0
Maximum Value
200% Rated Drive Output Current
Parameter Number
1
Parameter Type
Read Only
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
Factory Default
None
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
200% Rated Drive Output Voltage
Parameter Number
23
Parameter Type
Read Only
Display Units / Drive Units
1 kilowatt / 4096 = Drive Rated kW
Factory Default
None
Minimum Value
–200% Rated Drive Output Power
Maximum Value
+200% Rated Drive Output Power
Parameter Number
53
Parameter Type
Read Only
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
Factory Default
None
Minimum Value
0
Maximum Value
200% DC Bus Voltage Max
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
66
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
+ 400.00 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
65
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
+ 400.00 Hz
5–8
Programming
Metering
[4-20 mA Hertz]
This parameter displays the frequency command
present at analog current input terminals 4 & 6 of
TB2. This value is displayed whether or not this is
the active frequency command.
[0-10 Volt Hertz]
This parameter displays the frequency command
present at analog voltage input terminals 4 & 5 of
TB2. This value is displayed whether or not this is
the active frequency command.
[Pot Hertz]
This parameter displays the frequency command
present at remote pot terminals 1, 2 & 3 of TB2.
This value is displayed whether or not this is the
active frequency command.
[Pulse/Enc Hertz]
This parameter displays the frequency command
present at pulse input terminals 7 & 8 of TB2 or at
the encoder input terminals on TB3 (if present). This
value is displayed whether or not this is the active
frequency command.
[MOP Hertz]
This parameter displays the frequency command
from the MOP. The MOP frequency command can
be adjusted by TB3 (if present) and an appropriate
[Input Mode] is selected (see Input Mode Selection
figure in Chapter 2). Some SCANport adapters,
including the RIO Adapter, can also adjust the MOP
frequency command. This value is displayed
whether or not this is the active frequency
command.
[Heatsink Temp]
This parameter displays the heatsink temperature.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
140
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
139
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
138
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
63
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
137
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
70
Read Only
1° C / Deg. C
None
0
255° C
Programming
5–9
Metering
[Power OL Count]– Firmware 4.01 & later
Displays the percentage of accumulated I2t for the
drive thermal overload protection. Running
continuously above 115% of drive rated amps will
accumulate a value of 100% and generate an
Overtemp Fault (F08).
[Motor OL Count]– Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter displays the percentage of
accumulated I2t for the motor overload protection.
Running continuously at programmed [Overload
Amps] will accumulate approximately 70%.
Reduction of load will reduce the OL count. 100%
value will generate an Overload Fault (F07).
[Last Fault]
This parameter displays the last drive fault. It is
updated whenever a new fault occurs.
[Torque Current]
This parameter displays the amount of current that
is in phase with the fundamental voltage component.
It is the current that is actually producing torque.
[Flux Current]
This parameter displays the amount of current that
is out of phase with the fundamental voltage
component. It is the current required to maintain
motor flux.
[% Output Power]
This parameter displays the % output power of the
drive.
[% Output Curr]
This parameter displays the % output current of the
drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
84
Read Only
1 % / 4096 = 100%
None
0%
200%
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
202
Read Only
1 % / 4096 = 100%
None
0%
200%
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
4
Read Only
Fault Number / Fault Number
None
None
None
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
162
Read Only
0.1 Amp / 4096 = Rated Amps (Motoring)
None
–200% Drive Rating
+200% Drive Rating
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
163
Read Only
0.1 Amp / 4096 = Rated Amps (Motoring)
None
–200% Drive Rating
+200% Drive Rating
Parameter Number
3
Parameter Type
Read Only
Display Units / Drive Units
1 % / ±4096 = ±100%
Factory Default
None
Minimum Value
–200% Drive Rated Output Power
Maximum Value
+200% Drive Rated Output Power
Parameter Number
2
Parameter Type
Read Only
Display Units / Drive Units
1 % / 4096 = 100%
Factory Default
None
Minimum Value
0%
Maximum Value
200% Rated Drive Output Current
5–10
Programming
Setup
[Input Mode]
This parameter selects the functions of inputs 1-8 at
TB3 when an optional interface card is installed.
Refer to Input Mode Selection figure in Chapter 2.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running. Power to the drive must be cycled before
any changes will affect drive operation.
[Freq Select 1]
This parameter controls which of the frequency
sources is currently supplying the
[Freq Command] to the drive unless
[Freq Select 2] or [Preset Freq 1-7] is selected.
[Accel Time 1]
This value determines the time it will take the drive
to ramp from 0 Hz to [Maximum Freq]. The rate
determined by this value and [Maximum Freq] is
linear unless [S Curve Enable] is “Enabled.” It
applies to any increase in command frequency
unless [Accel Time 2] is selected.
[Decel Time 1]
This value determines the time it will take the drive
to ramp from [Maximum Freq] to 0 Hz. The rate
determined by this value and [Maximum Freq] is
linear unless [S Curve Enable] is “Enabled.” It
applies to any decrease in command frequency
unless [Decel Time 2] is selected.
[Base Frequency]
[Base Voltage]
[Maximum Voltage]
This group of parameters defines basic operation and should be programmed before initial
use of the drive. For advanced programming and information on specific parameters, refer
to the flow chart on pages 5–2 & 5–3.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
21
Read and Write
Mode Number / Selection
1
1
24
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
5
Read and Write
“Adapter 1”
Display Drive
“Adapter 1” 6
“Adapter 2” 7
“Adapter 3” 8
“Adapter 4” 9
“Adapter 5” 10
“Adapter 6” 11
“Preset 1-7” 12-18
“Use Last” 0
“Remote Pot” 1
“0-10 Volt” 2
“4-20 mA” 3
“Pulse Ref” 4 Refer to [Pulse/Enc Scale] Scale Value
“MOP” 5
Parameter Number
7
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 (x 100 frn < 4.01)
Factory Default
10.0 Sec
Minimum Value
0.0 Sec
Maximum Value
3600.0 Sec (600.0 frn < 4.01)
Important: Please note the resolution and Maximum Value changes with Frn 4.01.
Parameter Number
8
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 (x 100 frn < 4.01)
Factory Default
10.0 Sec
Minimum Value
0.0 Sec
Maximum Value
3600.0 Sec (600.0 frn < 4.01)
Important: Please note the resolution and Maximum Value changes with Frn 4.01.
These parameters were moved to the “Motor Control” group in firmware version 4.01.
Refer to page 5–53 for parameter descriptions.
Programming
5–11
Setup
Constant Speed
Dece
Speed
ion
lerat
A c ce
lerat
ion
Accel/Decel Time
0
Accel Time
Time
Decel Time
0
[Minimum Freq]
This parameter sets the lowest frequency the drive
will output.
[Maximum Freq]
This parameter sets the highest frequency the drive
will output.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
[Stop Select 1]
This parameter selects the stopping mode when the
drive receives a valid stop command unless
[Stop Select 2] is selected.
Parameter Number
16
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
Factory Default
0 Hz
Minimum Value
0 Hz
Maximum Value
120 Hz
Important: Please note the resolution change with Frn 4.01.
Parameter Number
19
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
Factory Default
60 Hz
Minimum Value
25 Hz
Maximum Value
400 Hz
Important: Please note the resolution change with Frn 4.01.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
10
Read and Write
“Coast”
Display Drive
“Coast” 0 Causes the drive to turn off immediately.
“DC Brake” 1 Injects DC braking voltage into the motor.
Requires a value in both [DC Hold Time]
& [DC Hold Level].
“Ramp” 2 Drive decelerates to 0 Hz., then if [DC
Hold Time] & [DC Hold Level] are greater
than zero the holding brake is applied. If
the values equal zero, then the drive
turns off. Requires a value in [Decel Time
1] or [Decel Time 2].
“S Curve” 3 Drive causes S Curve Ramp to 0 Hz in
[Decel Time 1] or [Decel Time 2] x 2.
“Ramp to Hold” 4 Drive decelerates to zero Hertz then
injects holding brake per [DC Hold Level]
(limited to 70% of drive rated amps) until
a) a Start command is issued or b) the
Enable input is opened.
[Current Limit]
This parameter sets the maximum drive output
current that is allowed before current limiting occurs.
Parameter Number
36
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units 1% of Max Drive Output Current / 4096 = 100%
Factory Default
150%
Minimum Value
20% of [Rated Amps]
Maximum Value
160% of [Rated Amps]
5–12
Programming
Setup
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Current Lmt Sel]– Firmware 4.01 & later
Selects the source of the [Current Limit] setting for
the drive. When an external input is selected (0-10V
or 4-20 mA), the minimum signal (0V or 4 mA) sets
20% current limit and the maximum signal (10V or
20mA) sets the value programmed in [Current Limit].
232
Read and Write
“Current Lmt”
Display Drive
“Current Lmt” 0 Use [Current Limit], param. 36.
“0-10 Volt” 1 Adjustable through 10V input, TB2,
4 & 5.
“4-20 mA” 2 Adjustable through 4-20mA input,
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
TB2, 4 & 6.
[Adaptive I Lim] – Firmware 4.01 & later
When ENABLED, this parameter maintains normal
current limit control to provide normal acceleration
into medium to high system inertia.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
227
Read and Write
“Enabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
37
Read and Write
“No Derate” (“Max Derate” frn < 4.01)
Display Drive
“Max Derate” 2 2:1 Speed Range Derate below
When DISABLED, this parameter applies a feed
forward command to acceleration, allowing quicker
accel times from stopped to commanded speed with
low system inertia.
[Overload Mode]
This parameter selects the derating factor for the I2T
electronic overload function. Motors designed to
operate with wider speed ranges need less overload
derating.
50% of Base Speed
“Min Derate” 1 4:1 Speed Range. Derate below
25% of Base Speed
“No Derate” 0 10:1 Speed Range. No Derating
Overload Patterns
No Derate
Time to Trip vs. Current (Firmware 4.01 & Up)
1000
% of Load
100
80
60
40
20
Min Derate
% of Load
100
80
60
40
20
0
Time to Trip - Seconds
0
100
Cold
10
Max Derate
Hot
% of Load
100
80
60
40
20
115%
1
0
0
25
50
75 100 125 150 175 200
% of Base Speed
1
10
Multiple of [Overload Amps]
Programming
5–13
Setup
[Overload Amps]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate Full
Load Amps (FLA) for 1.15 SF motors. For 1.0 SF
motors the value should be set to 0.9 x nameplate
FLA.
[VT Scaling]
This parameter scales the drive for VT ampere
ratings.
Parameter Number
38
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
0.1 Amps / 4096 = Rated Amps
Factory Default
115% of Drive Rating
Minimum Value
20% of Drive Rated Amps
Maximum Value
115% of Drive Rated Amps
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
203
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0 Disables Variable Torque Scaling
“Enabled” 1 Enables Variable Torque Scaling
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
177
Read and Write
1 RPM / 1 RPM
1750 RPM
60 RPM
24000 RPM
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
178
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
60 Hz
1 Hz
400 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
190
Read and Write
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rated Volts
Drive Rated Volts
0 Volts
2 x Drive Rated Volts
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
191
Read and Write
1 Amp / 4096 = Drive Rated Amps
Drive Rated Amps
0 Amps
2 x Drive Rated Amps
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
[Motor NP RPM]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate
rated RPM.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
[Motor NP Hertz]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate
rated frequency.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
[Motor NP Volts]– Firmware 4.01 & later
This value should be set to the motor nameplate
rated volts.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
[Motor NP Amps]– Firmware 4.01 & later
This value should be set to the motor nameplate
rated current.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
5–14
Programming
Advanced
Setup
[Minimum Freq]
This parameter sets the lowest frequency the drive
will output.
[Maximum Freq]
This parameter sets the highest frequency the drive
will output.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
This group contains parameters that are required to setup advanced functions of the drive
for complex applications.
Parameter Number
16
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
Factory Default
0 Hz
Minimum Value
0 Hz
Maximum Value
120 Hz
Important: Please note the resolution change with Frn 4.01.
Parameter Number
19
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
Factory Default
60 Hz
Minimum Value
25 Hz
Maximum Value
400 Hz
Important: Please note the resolution change with Frn 4.01.
[Base Frequency]
[Base Voltage]
[Break Frequency]
[Break Voltage]
[Maximum Voltage]
These parameters were moved to the “Motor Control” group in firmware version 4.01.
Refer to pages 5–52 and 5–53 for parameter descriptions.
[DC Boost Select] – Firmware below 4.01
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
This parameter sets the level of DC Boost that will
be applied at low frequencies (typically 0-7 Hz).
Auto settings automatically measure motor
resistance and adjust the boost voltage to maintain
constant boost performance regardless of changing
motor temperature.
If this boost voltage (typically used for faster
acceleration) is excessive for constant low speed
operation, it can be automatically reduced to
acceptable levels by programming [Run/Accel
Boost].
Refer to the diagram on page 5–51 for further
information.
[Start Boost]
[Run Boost]
9
Read and Write
“Auto 30%”
Display Drive
“Fan Sel #1” 0 see “Fan Select 1 & 2/No Boost”
drawing below
“Fan Sel #2” 1 see “Fan Select 1 & 2/No Boost”
drawing below
“No Boost” 2 see “Fan Select 1 & 2/No Boost”
drawing below
“Auto 15%”
“Auto 30%”
“Auto 45%”
“Auto 60%”
“Auto 75%”
“Auto 90%”
“Auto 105%”
“Auto 120%”
“Full Custom”
“Fixed”
3 minimum auto boost
4
.
5
.
6
.
7
.
8
.
9
.
10 maximum auto boost
11 see “Full Custom” drawing below
12 see “Fixed” drawing below
These parameters were moved to the “Motor Control” group in firmware version 4.01.
Refer to page 5–52 for parameter descriptions.
Programming
Advanced Setup
[Run/Accel Boost] – Firmware below 4.01
Sets the percentage of Auto Boost that is applied to
the motor during constant speed or decel. If Auto
Boost is selected in the [DC Boost Select]
parameter (see preceding page), boost is applied as
shown in the adjacent chart.
[PWM Frequency]
This parameter sets the carrier frequency for the
sine coded PWM output waveform.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Parameter Number
169
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
1%
Factory Default
100%
Minimum Value
0%
Maximum Value
100%
Drive Mode
Auto Boost Applied
Accelerating
Programmed Auto Boost %
Constant Speed
Programmed Auto Boost % x [Run/Accel Boost]
Decelerating
Programmed Auto Boost % x [Run/Accel Boost]
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Refer to page 1–1 for Frame Reference information
and the Derating Guidelines in Appendix A.
[Analog Invert] – Firmware below 4.01
This parameter enables the inverting function for the
analog input signal at TB2.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
84
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Analog Invert
45
Read and Write
2 KHz / KHz/2
Based on drive type
2 KHz
A Frame Drives = 10 kHz
B Frame Drives = 8 kHz
C Frame Drives & Up = 6 kHz
Maximum
Speed
Dis
Drive Output
Frequency
ed
a bl
Ena
bled
Minimum
Frequency
0V
4 mA
[Analog Trim En]
This parameter enables the pot terminals at TB2,
terminals 1, 2 & 3 as a trim function to the analog
inputs at TB2 terminals 4 & 5 or 4 & 6. A 10k ohm
pot provides a trim range of approximately 10% of
[Maximum Freq]. Drive status must be “Stopped”
before programming changes will take effect.
Analog Input Signal
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
10 V
20 mA
90
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
5–15
5–16
Programming
Advanced Setup
[4-20mA Loss Sel]
This parameter selects the drives reaction to a loss
of 4-20mA signal when the active [Freq Source] is
4-20mA.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
150
Read and Write
“Min/Alarm”
Display Drive
“Min/Alarm” 0 Drive outputs [Minimum Freq] and
issues an alarm.
“Stop/Fault” 1 Drive stops and issues “Hertz Err
Fault”.
“Hold/Alarm” 2 Drive maintains last output freq and
issues an alarm.
“Max/Alarm” 3 Drive outputs [Maximum Freq] and
issues an alarm.
“Pre1/Alarm” 4 Drive outputs [Preset Freq 1] and
issues an alarm.
[Accel Time 2]
This value determines the time it will take the drive
to ramp from 0 Hz to [Maximum Freq]. The rate
determined by this value and [Maximum Freq] is
linear unless [S Curve Enable] is “Enabled.” It
applies to any increase in command frequency
unless [Accel Time 1] is selected.
[Decel Time 2]
This value determines the time it will take the drive
to ramp from [Maximum Freq] to 0 Hz. The rate
determined by this value and [Maximum Freq] is
linear unless [S Curve Enable] is “Enabled.” It
applies to any decrease in command frequency
unless [Decel Time 1] is selected.
[Stop Select 1]
This parameter selects the stopping mode when the
drive receives a valid stop command unless
[Stop Select 2] is selected.
Parameter Number
30
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 (x 100 frn < 4.01)
Factory Default
10.0 Sec
Minimum Value
0.0 Sec
Maximum Value
3600.0 Sec (600.0 frn < 4.01)
Important: Please note the resolution and Maximum Value changes with Frn 4.01.
Parameter Number
31
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 (x 100 frn < 4.01)
Factory Default
10.0 Sec
Minimum Value
0.0 Sec
Maximum Value
3600.0 Sec (600.0 frn < 4.01)
Important: Please note the resolution and Maximum Value changes with Frn 4.01.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
10
Read and Write
“Coast”
Display Drive
“Coast” 0 Causes the drive to turn off immediately.
“DC Brake” 1 Injects DC braking voltage into the motor.
Requires a value in both [DC Hold Time]
& [DC Hold Level].
“Ramp” 2 Drive decelerates to 0 Hz., then if [DC
Hold Time] & [DC Hold Level] are greater
than zero the holding brake is applied. If
the values equal zero, then the drive
turns off. Requires a value in [Decel Time
1] or [Decel Time 2].
“S Curve” 3 Drive causes S Curve Ramp to 0 Hz in
[Decel Time 1] or [Decel Time 2] x 2.
“Ramp to Hold” 4 Drive decelerates to zero Hertz then
injects holding brake per [DC Hold Level]
(limited to 70% of drive rated amps) until
a) a Start command is issued or b) the
Enable input is opened.
Programming
5–17
Advanced Setup
[DC Hold Time]
This value sets the amount of time that the
[DC Hold Level] voltage will be applied to the motor
when the stop mode is set to either
”DC Brake” or “Ramp.”
[DC Hold Level]
This value sets the DC voltage applied to the motor
to produce the selected current during braking,
when the stop mode is set to either “DC Brake,”
“Ramp” or “Ramp to Hold.” If “Ramp to Hold” is the
active stop mode, [DC Hold Level] will be clamped
at 70%, even if higher values are programmed.
Parameter Number
12
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Second / Seconds x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
Factory Default
0.0 Sec (0 frn < 4.01)
Minimum Value
0.0 Sec (0 frn < 4.01)
Maximum Value
90.0 Sec (15 frn < 4.01)
Important: Please note the resolution and value changes with Frn 4.01.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
!
13
Read and Write
1 % of [Rated Amps] / 4096 = 100%
100 %
0%
150 %
ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of
equipment or material exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking
device must be used to stop the motor.
ATTENTION: This feature should not be used with
synchronous or permanent magnet motors. Motors may be
demagnetized during braking.
[Hold Level Sel]– Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter selects the hold level source for [DC
Hold Level].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
231
Read and Write
“DC Hold Lvl”
Display Drive
“DC Hold Lvl” 0 Use [DC Hold Level], param. 13.
“0-10 Volt” 1 Adjustable through 10V input, TB2,
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
4 & 5.
“4-20 mA” 2 Adjustable through 4-20mA input,
TB2, 4 & 6.
Ramp-to-Stop
Brake-to-Stop
Voltage
Vo
lt a
Volts/Speed
Spee
ge
Volts/Speed
DC Hold
Time
Speed
d
DC Hold
Time
DC Hold Level
Stop Command
Time
Time
Ramp-to-Hold
Vo
lt a
Volts/Speed
Spee
Reissuing a Start Command
at this point will cause
the drive to Restart
and Ramp as
shown
ge
d
DC Hold Level
Stop Command
Time
DC Hold Level
Opening Enable Input instead
of reissuing a Start Command
will cause drive to Stop
Stop Command
5–18
Programming
Advanced Setup
[Bus Limit En]
Enables the function that attempts to limit the drive
DC bus voltage to 110% of nominal voltage during
rapid decel. If bus voltage rises above the 110% level,
[BUS Limit En] reduces or stops the drive decel rate
until bus voltage falls below the 110% level.
[Motor Type]
This parameter should be set to match the type of
motor connected to the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
11
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0 Allow bus voltage to rise above
110%.
“Enabled” 1 Limit bus voltage/decel ramp.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
41
Read and Write
“Induction”
Display Drive
“Induction” 0 Requires no additional setting.
“Sync Reluc” 1 [Slip @ F.L.A.] must be set to zero.
“Sync PM” 2 [Stop Select 1 & 2] must be set to a
selection other than “DC Brake” and
[Slip @ F.L.A.] be set to zero.
[Stop Select 2]
This parameter selects the stopping mode when the
drive receives a valid stop command unless
[Stop Select 1] is selected.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
52
Read and Write
“Coast”
Display Drive
“Coast” 0 Causes the drive to turn off immediately.
“DC Brake” 1 Injects DC braking voltage into the motor.
Requires a value in both [DC Hold Time]
& [DC Hold Level].
“Ramp” 2 Drive decelerates to 0 Hz., then if [DC
Hold Time] & [DC Hold Level] are greater
than zero the holding brake is applied. If
the values equal zero, then the drive
turns off. Requires a value in [Decel Time
1] or [Decel Time 2].
“S Curve” 3 Drive causes S Curve Ramp to 0 Hz in
[Decel Time 1] or [Decel Time 2] x 2.
“Ramp to Hold” 4 Drive decelerates to zero Hertz then
injects holding brake per [DC Hold Level]
(limited to 70% of drive rated amps) until
a) a Start command is issued or b) the
Enable input is opened.
[KI Amps] – Firmware 2.03-3.01
Sets the integral gain for the current limiting
function of the drive. Default values are chosen for
high inertia loads. If faster accel is required, raising
the gain will allow additional current to the motor.
Excess gain settings may create unstable operation.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
192
Read and Write
NA / NA
100
25
800
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
193
Read and Write
NA / NA
100
25
400 (800 frn < 3.01)
Important: [Kp Amps] should be adjusted in equal
proportion or unstable operation may occur.
[KP Amps]
Sets the proportional gain for the current limiting
function of the drive. Default values are chosen for
high inertia loads. If faster accel is required, raising
the gain will allow additional current to the motor.
Excess gain settings may create unstable operation.
Programming
5–19
This group of parameters contains internally stored frequency settings.
Frequency Set
[Freq Select 1]
This parameter controls which of the frequency
sources is currently supplying the
[Freq Command] to the drive unless
[Freq Select 2] or [Preset Freq 1-7] is selected.
Refer to the Speed Select Input Table in Chapter 2.
[Freq Select 2]
This parameter controls which of the frequency
sources is currently supplying the
[Freq Command] to the drive unless
[Freq Select 1] or [Preset Freq 1-7] is selected.
Refer to the Speed Select Input Table in Chapter 2.
[Jog Frequency]
This parameter sets the frequency the drive will
output when it receives a valid jog command.
[Preset Freq 1-7]
These values set the frequencies that the drive will
output when selected. Refer to Speed Select Input
table in Chapter 2.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
5
Read and Write
“Adapter 1”
Display Drive
“Adapter 1” 6
“Adapter 2” 7
“Adapter 3” 8
“Adapter 4” 9
“Adapter 5” 10
“Adapter 6” 11
“Preset 1-7” 12-18
“Use Last” 0
“Remote Pot” 1
“0-10 Volt” 2
“4-20 mA” 3
“Pulse Ref” 4 Refer to [Pulse/Enc Scale] Scale Value
“MOP” 5
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
6
Read and Write
“Preset 1”
Display Drive
“Adapter 1” 6
“Adapter 2” 7
“Adapter 3” 8
“Adapter 4” 9
“Adapter 5” 10
“Adapter 6” 11
“Preset 1-7” 12-18
“Use Last” 0
“Remote Pot” 1
“0-10 Volt” 2
“4-20 mA” 3
“Pulse Ref” 4 Refer to [Pulse/Enc Scale] Scale Value
“MOP” 5
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
24
Read and Write
0.1 Hertz / Hertz x 100
10.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
400.0 Hz
Parameter Number(s)
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
27-29 & 73-76
Read and Write
0.1 Hertz / Hertz x 100
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
400.0 Hz
5–20
Programming
Frequency Set
Parameter Number(s)
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
32-34
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz
400 Hz
0 Hz
400 Hz
This parameter determines the band width around a
[Skip Frequency]. The actual band width is
2 x [Skip Freq Band] –– 1/2 the band above and 1/2
the band below the skip frequency.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
35
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz
0 Hz
0 Hz
15 Hz
Skip Frequency Band
Frequency
[Skip Freq 1-3]
These values, in conjunction with [Skip Freq Band],
create a range of frequencies at which the drive will
not continuously operate.
[Skip Freq Band]
Actual
ive
Dr
Command
Frequency
Frequency
Skip Band
Skip Frequency
Time
[MOP Increment]
This value sets the rate of increase or decrease to
the [Freq Command] for each input to the Dig Pot
Up or Dig Pot Down terminals at TB3 –– Requires
[Input Mode] selection 5, 9, 10 or 15 (see Input
Mode Selection figure in Chapter 2), RIO Adapter or
other SCANport adapter to function.
[Save MOP Ref] – Firmware 4.01 & later
If this parameter is enabled, the frequency
command issued by the MOP inputs will be saved to
EEPROM (in the event of power loss) and reused on
power up. When disabled, no value is saved and the
MOP reference is reset to zero on power up.
[Freq Ref SqRoot]–Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter activates the square root function for
0-10V or 4-20 mA inputs when used as a frequency
reference. If the input signal varies with the square
of speed, the parameter should be set to “Enabled.”
Parameter Number
22
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
0.1 Hertz/Second / 255=(78% of [Maximum Freq])/Sec
Factory Default
1.1 Hz/Sec
Minimum Value
0 Hz/Sec
Maximum Value
(78% of [Maximum Freq]) / Sec
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
230
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
229
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
Programming
5–21
Frequency Set
[Pulse/Enc Scale]
This parameter contains the scaling factor for both
pulse train inputs (TB2-7, 8) and encoder feedback
speed regulation (TB3 terminals 31-36).
1. Encoder Feedback Operation
Enter actual encoder pulses per revolution
2. Pulse Train Input
Scale
Incoming Pulse Rate (Hz)
Motor Poles
=
x
Factor
Desired Command Freq.
2
Feature Select
[Dwell Frequency]
This value sets the frequency that the drive will
immediately output (no Accel Ramp) upon a start
command. This parameter requires a programmed
[Dwell Time].
[Dwell Time]
This value sets the time the drive will continue to
output [Dwell Frequency] before ramping to [Freq
Command].
Dwell Time
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
46
Read and Write
Factor / Pulses per Rev
1024 PPR (64 PPR frn < 4.01)
1
4096
Pulse Train Example:
3840 Hz 4 Poles
Pulse/Enc Scale =
= 128
x
4 Pole Motor, 60 Hz = Max. Speed.
60 Hz
2
The 1336–MOD–N1 option outputs 64 Hz/Hz.
At full analog reference, the pulse output will This value will create a command frequency of
be 60 Hz x 64 Hz/Hz = 3840 pulses/sec.
60 Hz for full analog reference to the option.
This group contains the necessary parameters to activate and program advanced features
of the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
43
Read and Write
0.1 Hertz / Hertz x 10
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
7.0 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
44
Read and Write
1 Second / Seconds
0 Sec
0 Sec
10 Sec
Maximum
Frequency of
Applied Voltage
Dwell
Time
Dwell Frequency
0
0
Start
Command
Time
5–22
Programming
Feature Select
[Speed Control]
This parameter selects the type of speed modulation
active in the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
77
Read and Write
“Slip Comp” (“No Control” frn < 4.01)
Display Drive
“No Control” 0 Frequency regulation
“Slip Comp” 1 Slip compensation
“Speed Droop” 2 Negative slip compensation
“PLL” 3 Phase lock loop (requires frn < 4.01)
“Encoder Fdbk” 4 Encoder feedback–closed loop
“Droop + Reg” 5 Enc. fdbk.–closed loop w/ active droop
“P Jump” 6 Traverse function
“Process PI” 7 Closed loop PI control
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
42
Read and Write
0.1 Hertz / Hertz x 10
1.0 Hz (0.0 Hz frn < 4.01)
0.0 Hz
10.0 Hz (5.0 frn < 4.01)
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
195
Read and Write
None
1
1
40
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
14
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Important: If encoder feedback closed loop speed
regulation is required, “Encoder Fdbk” must be
selected.
[Slip @ F.L.A.]
This value sets the amount of automatic increase or
decrease to the drive output to compensate for
motor slip. When [Speed Control] is set to “Slip
Comp”, a percentage of this value proportional to
output current is added to the drive output
frequency. When [Speed Control] is set to “Droop”, a
percentage of this value proportional to output
current is subtracted from the drive output
frequency.
[Slip Comp Gain]– Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter is the gain for the slip compensation
and adjusts the recovery rate after a load change.
[Run On Power Up]
This parameter enables the function that allows the
drive to automatically restart on Power Up. This
parameter requires that a two wire control scheme
be installed at TB3 and that a valid start contact be
present. Refer to Input Mode Selection figure in
Chapter 2.
!
[Reset/Run Tries]
This value sets the maximum number of times the
drive attempts to reset a fault and restart before the
drive issues a “Max Retries Fault”. See Chapter 6 for
a list of resettable faults.
ATTENTION: This parameter may only be used as outlined in
NFPA79, paragraph 6-14 (exceptions 1-3) for specialized
applications. Equipment damage and/or personal injury may
result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
85
Read and Write
1 Try / Tries
0
0
9
Programming
5–23
Feature Select
[Reset/Run Time]
This value sets the time between restart attempts
when [Reset/Run Tries] is set to a value other than
zero.
[S Curve Enable]
This parameter enables the fixed shape S curve
accel/decel ramp. Programmed accel/decel times
are doubled if [S Curve Time] is set to “0”. An
adjustable S curve will be created if [S Curve Time]
is greater than zero.
[S Curve Time]
This creates an adjustable s curve ramp. If S Curve
Time is < the programmed accel/decel time, the
actual ramp will be the sum of the two. If S Curve
Time is ≥ the programmed accel/decel times, a fixed
S curve will be created whose time is double the
programmed accel/decel time.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
15
Read and Write
0.1 Second / Seconds x 100
1.0 Sec
0.5 Sec
30.0 Sec
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
57
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
Parameter Number
56
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 (x 100 frn < 4.01)
Factory Default
0.0 Sec
Minimum Value
0.0 Sec
Maximum Value
1800.0 Sec (300.0 frn < 4.01)
Important: Please note the resolution and Maximum Value changes with Frn 4.01.
Fixed S Curve
Accel Time = 2 x [Accel Time 1 or 2]
Decel Time = 2 x [Decel Time 1 or 2]
Adjustable S Curve
Case 1 (see adjacent diagram)
[S Curve Time] < [Accel Time 1 or 2], and
[S Curve Time] < [Decel Time 1 or 2],
then
Accel Time = [Accel Time 1 or 2] + [S Curve Time],
and
Decel Time = [Decel Time 1 or 2] + [S Curve Time]
Case 2
[S Curve Time] ≥ [Accel Time 1 or 2], and
[S Curve Time] ≥ [Decel Time 1 or 2],
then
Accel Time = 2 x [Accel Time 1 or 2], and
Decel Time = 2 x [Decel Time 1 or 2]
Note: If [S Curve Time] ≥ programmed accel/decel
times any further increase in [S Curve Time] will
have no effect on the total accel/decel times.
Speed
Accel Time
1 or 2
Decel Time
1 or 2
Time
S Curve Time + Accel Time 1 or 2
S Curve Time + Decel Time 1 or 2
Speed
Accel Time
1 or 2
Time
Decel Time
1 or 2
5–24
Programming
Feature Select
[Language]
This parameter selects between English and the
alternate language for the HIM display.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
47
Read and Write
“English”
Display Drive
“English” 0
“Alternate” 1
[Speed Control]
This parameter is now located earlier in this group (effective with firmware version 4.01).
Refer to page 5–22 for parameter description.
[Flying Start En]
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
This value enables the flying start function and
chooses the method to be used. The drive will first
search from the direction it was last running.
155
Read and Write
Disabled
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Speed Search” 1 Freq. sweep –see [FStart For./Rev.]
“Use Encoder” 2 Requires feedback encoder
“Track Volts” 3 Read back EMF from sync. p.m.
motor
!
[FStart Forward]
This value sets the frequency at which the forward
speed search begins. If this value exceeds
[Maximum Freq], speed search will begin at
[Maximum Freq]. Forward search ends at zero Hertz
or when motor speed is found.
[FStart Reverse]
This value sets the frequency at which the reverse
speed search begins. If this value exceeds
[Maximum Freq], speed search will begin at
[Maximum Freq]. Reverse search ends at zero Hertz
or when motor speed is found.
[LLoss Restart] – Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter selects the reconnect mode after
recovery from a line loss condition.
ATTENTION: The “Speed Search” selection should not be
used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors. Motors
may be demagnetized during braking.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
156
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz
60 Hz
0 Hz
400 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
157
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz
0 Hz
0 Hz
400 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
228
Read and Write
“Track Volts”
Display Drive
“Speed Search” 1 Frequency sweep
“Use Encoder” 2 Read feedback
“Track Volts” 3 Read motor volts
“Last Speed” 4 Start at last output
Programming
5–25
Feature Select
[Traverse Period]
This value sets the time to complete one cycle of
speed modulation.
[Max Traverse]
This value sets the peak amplitude of speed
modulation.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
78
Read and Write
0.01 Second / Seconds x 100
0.00 Sec
0.00 Sec
30.00 Sec
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Traverse Function
79
Read and Write
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = [Maximum Freq]
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
50% of [Maximum Freq]
Traverse Period
P-Jump (+)
40
Output
Maximum Traverse (+)
P-Jump (–)
Reference
Maximum Traverse (–)
Hertz
20
Traverse
0
P-Jump
–20
10
20
30
40
50
60
Seconds
[P Jump]
This value sets the slip or inertia compensation
amplitude of speed modulation.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
80
Read and Write
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = [Maximum Freq]
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
25% of [Maximum Freq]
5–26
Programming
I/O Config
[Input Mode]
This parameter selects the functions of inputs 1-8 at
TB3 when an optional interface card is installed.
Refer to Input Mode Selection figure in Chapter 2.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running. Power to the drive must be cycled before
any changes will affect drive operation.
This group of parameters contains the programming options for digital and analog drive
outputs. This group was named “Output Config” in firmware versions before 4.01.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[CR1-4 Out Select]–Firmware 4.01 & later Parameter Number
This parameter sets the condition that changes the
state of the output contacts at TB2 terminals 10 & 11
(CR1), 11 & 12 (CR2), 13, 14, 15 (CR3) and 16, 17,
18 (CR4).
A change of state may mean energize or
de-energize the relay, since some relays may
energize on power-up and de-energize when the
selected condition occurs.
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
A red LED located on the Main Control Board
indicates the status of the CR3 contact. The LED will
illuminate when the contacts at terminals 13 & 14 of
TB2 are closed and terminals 14 & 15 are open.
[Digital Out Sel] – Firmware below 4.01
This parameter sets the condition that closes the
output contact at TB2 terminals 10 & 11.
[Dig Out Freq]
This value sets the trip point for the output contact at
TB2 terminals 10 & 11 when [Digital Out Sel] is set
to “At Frequency”. The contact will be closed when
above this value.
[Dig Out Current]
This value sets the trip point for the output contact at
TB2 terminals 10 & 11 when [Digital Out Sel] is set
to “At Current”. The contact will be closed when
above this value.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
21
Read and Write
Mode Number / Selection
1
1
24
158, 174-176
Read and Write
“At speed” CR1
“Running” CR2
“Fault” CR3
“Alarm” CR4
Display Drive
“Running” 2 Outputting frequency
“At Speed” 3 Output = command
“At Freq” 4 Requires value in [Dig Out Freq]
“At Current” 5 Requires value in [Dig Out Curr]
“At Torque” 6 Requires value in [Dig Out Torque]
“Current Lmt” 7 In overload
“Mtr Overload” 8 At present levels O.L. will occur
“Line Loss” 9 Line loss in progress
“Drive Power” 10 Full input volts present, bus charged
“Drive Ready” 11 All necessary commands present
“Forward Run” 12 Forward direction
“Reverse Run” 13 Reverse direction
“Braking” 14 DC brake mode (stopping or holding)
“Economize” 15 Auto economizer active
“Auto Reset” 16 Attempt to reset fault & restart drive
“Fault” 0 Any fault
“Alarm” 1 Any unmasked alarm
158
Read and Write
“At Speed”
Display Drive
“At Speed” 0
“At Frequency” 1 Requires value in [Dig Out Freq]
“At Current” 2 Requires value in [Dig Out Curr]
“At Torque” 3 Requires value in [Dig Out Torque]
Parameter Number
159
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Max Freq
Factory Default
0.00 Hz
Minimum Value
0.00 Hz
Maximum Value
Programmed [Maximum Freq]
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
160
Read and Write
0% / 4096 = 100% of Drive Rated Amps
0%
0%
200 %
Programming
5–27
I/O Config
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Dig Out Torque]
This value sets the trip point for the output contact at
TB2 terminals 10 & 11 when [Digital Out Sel] is set
to “At Torque”. The contact will be closed when
above this value.
[Set 0-10 Vlt Lo] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the percentage of the 0-10 volt input that
represents [Minimum Freq].
[Set 0-10 Vlt Hi] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the percentage of the 0-10 volt input that
represents [Maximum Freq].
[Set 4-20 mA Lo] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the percentage of the 4-20 mA input that
represents [Minimum Freq].
[Set 4-20 mA Hi] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the percentage of the 4-20 mA input that
represents [Maximum Freq].
161
Read and Write
0.1 Amps / 4096 = Rated Torque Amps
0.0 Amps
0.0 Amps
200% of [Rated Amps]
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
237
Read and Write
0.1 % / 4096 = 100%
0.0 %
–300.0 %
+300.0 %
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
238
Read and Write
0.1 % / 4096 = 100%
100.0 %
–300.0 %
+300.0 %
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
239
Read and Write
0.1 % / 4096 = 100%
0.0 %
–300.0 %
+300.0 %
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
240
Read and Write
0.1 % / 4096 = 100%
100.0 %
–300.0 %
+300.0 %
Analog Input Configuration
Examples shown are for 0-10V. Settings for 4-20 mA are similar.
Offset
Invert
10
8
8
8
6
4
2
0
Input Volts
10
Input Volts
Input Volts
Normal/Default
10
6
4
2
0
0
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
Output Hertz
60
6
4
2
0
0
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
Output Hertz
0
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
Output Hertz
[Minimum Freq] = 0 Hz
[Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz
[Set 0-10 Vlt Lo] = 0%
[Set 0-10 Vlt Hi] = 100%
[Minimum Freq] = 0 Hz
[Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz
[Set 0-10 Vlt Lo] = 20%
[Set 0-10 Vlt Hi] = 100%
[Minimum Freq] = 0 Hz
[Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz
[Set 0-10 Vlt Lo] = 100%
[Set 0-10 Vlt Hi] = 0%
Minimum input (0% of 10V=0V) represents minimum
frequency of 0 Hz and maximum input (100% of
10V=10V) represents maximum frequency of 60 Hz.
2-10 volt input signal provides 0-60 Hz output, resulting
in a 2 volt offset in the speed command.
Maximum input (100% of 10V=10V) represents a
minimum frequency of 0 Hz & minimum input (0% of
10V=0V) represents a maximum frequency of 60 Hz.
60
5–28
Programming
I/O Config
[Analog Out Sel]
This parameter selects the source that will drive the
analog output. This output is intended for metering
only and should not be used as process control
feedback.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
25
Read and Write
“Frequency”
Display Drive
“Frequency” 0 Zero to programmed [Maximum Freq]
“Current” 1 Zero to 200%
“Torque” 2 Zero to 200%
“Power” 3 Zero to 200%
“Voltage” 4 Zero to 200%
“% Motor OL” 5 Zero to 200%
“% Drive OL” 6 Zero to 200%
“Encoder” 7 See [Pulse/Enc Hertz]
“Speed Error” 8 See [Speed Error]
“PI Reference” 9 See [PI Reference]
“PI Feedback” 10 See [PI Feedback]
“PI Error” 11 See [PI Error]
“PI Output” 12 See [PI Output]
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
154
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
Important: Firmware versions below 4.01 will have
fewer selections available.
[Anlg Out Offset]
This parameter enables the voltage or current offset
for the analog output TB2 terminals 4 & 9. This
internal value offsets 0-20mA to 4-20mA and
0-10V to 2-10V.
Analog Out Offset
Offset
Maximum
Speed
Drive Output
Frequency
Minimum
Frequency
0V
0 mA
[Abs Analog Out]–Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter selects whether a signed value or
absolute value is used for analog out.
[Set Anlg Out Lo]–Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the percentage of the [Analog Out Sel] value
that equals 0V/0 mA output.
[Set Anlg Out Hi]–Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the percentage of the [Analog Out Sel] value
that equals 10V/20 mA output.
2V
4 mA
Analog Output Signal
10 V
20 mA
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
233
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
234
Read and Write
0.1 % / 4096 = 100%
0.0 %
–300.0 %
+300.0 %
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
235
Read and Write
0.1 % / 4096 = 100%
100.0 %
–300.0 %
+300.0 %
Programming
5–29
This group of parameters allows configuring, viewing and clearing drive faults.
Faults
[Fault Buffer 0-3]
These parameters store the last (4) faults that occur.
[Clear Fault]
Selecting “Clear Fault” and pressing Enter will clear
any faults and return the drive to ready status.
[Cur Lim Trip En]
This setting determines the drive response when the
hardware current limit is exceeded. The current limit
is approximately 180% of [Rated VT Amps] for B
Frame drives & up, and approximately 250% of
[Rated VT Amps] for A Frame drives.
[Shear Pin Fault]–Firmware 4.01 & later
Enabling this parameter allows the drive to generate
a Shear Pin Fault (F63) if the output amps exceed
the programmed software current limit value in
[Current Limit].
[Motor OL Fault]–Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter enables or disables the motor
overload protection feature of the drive.
[Line Loss Fault]
This setting determines how a 15% drop in DC Bus
voltage will affect drive operation. See following
diagram.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
86-89
Read and Write
None
Display Drive
“0” 0 Last Fault
“1” 1 Fault from Buffer 0
“2” 2 Fault from Buffer 1
“3” 3 Fault from Buffer 2
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
51
Read and Write
“Ready”
Display Drive
“Ready” 0
“Clear Fault” 1
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
82
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated – C.L. Activated
“Enabled” 1 Diag C Lim Flt Generated
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
226
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated
“Enabled” 1 Fault Generated
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
201
Read and Write
“Enabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated
“Enabled” 1 Fault Generated
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
40
Read and Write
“Disabled” (“Enabled” frn < 4.01)
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated
“Enabled” 1 Power Loss Fault Generated
5–30
Programming
Faults
Power Loss Ride-Thru
The 1336 plus has the ability to ride through short power
interruptions. On loss of input power to the drive, the drive offers
two methods of operation.
Diagram 1
With the Line Loss Fault parameter disabled, if a power
interruption occurs (T1) the drive will continue to operate off
stored DC bus energy until bus voltage drops to 85% of its
nominal value (T2). At this point, the drive output is shut off,
allowing the DC bus to discharge more slowly. The drive will
retain its logic and operating status as long as bus voltage is
above the absolute minimum bus voltage (refer to Appendix). If
bus voltage should fall below this level (T5), the drive will trip and
Undervolt Fault will be displayed. If input power is restored before
this minimum is reached (T3) and bus voltage rises above the
85% level (T4), the drive will restore output power to the motor
and resume running.
DIAGRAM 1
Output
Output
Off
Logic
100% VBUS
85% VBUS
Minimum VBUS
Undervoltage Fault
(depends on [Low Bus Fault])
T3 T4 T5
T1 T2
T1 = Loss of Power
T2 = Bus Level at 85% of Nominal, Outputs Shut Off
T3 = Power Returned
T4 = Outputs Turned On
T5 = Minimum Bus Voltage Level, Undervoltage Fault Point
Diagram 2
With the Line Loss Fault parameter enabled, if input power is lost
(T1) the drive will continue to operate until the bus voltage falls
below 85% of nominal (T2). At this point the drive output is turned
off and a 500 ms timer is started. One of the following conditions
will then occur:
1. The bus voltage will fall below minimum before the time expires (T6). This will generate an Undervolt Fault.
2. The bus voltage will remain below 85% but above minimum
and the timer expires (T5). This will generate a Line Loss Fault.
3. The input power is restored (T3) and the bus voltage rises
above the 85% level before the timer expires (T4). This allows
the drive to turn its output on and resume running.
DIAGRAM 2
Output
Output
Off
Logic
100% VBUS
85% VBUS
Line Loss Fault
Minimum VBUS
Undervoltage Fault
(depends on [Low Bus Fault])
T1 T2
T3 T4 T6
T5
T1 = Loss of Power
Line Loss Restart
T2 = Bus Level at 85% of Nominal, Outputs Shut Off
In the event that a line loss condition occurs, the 1336 PLUS
provides a variety of programmable selections to control the
timing and method of reconnecting the motor after power returns.
Choices include:
– Use flying start to determine motor speed.
– Check for motor terminal voltage to determine motor speed.
– Read the encoder, if present.
– Reconnect at last known output frequency.
T4 = Outputs Turned On
T3 = Power Returned
T5 = 500mS Time Out, Line Loss Fault
T6 = Minimum Bus Voltage Level, Undervoltage Fault Point
Programming
5–31
Faults
[Blwn Fuse Flt]
Enabling this parameter will allow monitoring of the
bus fuse (in 30 kW/40 HP and up drives) and cause
a “Blwn Fuse Flt.”
[Low Bus Fault]
This parameter enables or disables the drive fault
condition for bus voltage below the Bus
Undervoltage Trip value listed in the Appendix.
[Fault Data]–Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter displays fault related parameter
numbers or bit array information. Certain faults
generate additional information to aid fault
diagnosis.
[Flt Motor Mode]
This parameter displays the motor mode active at
the time of the last fault.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
81
Read and Write
“Enabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated
“Enabled” 1 Blwn Fuse Flt Generated
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
91
Read and Write
“Enabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated
“Enabled” 1 Undervolt Fault Generated
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
207
Read and Write
Parameter # / Parameter #
None
1
255
143
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“1” 1 Power up sequence in progress
“2” 2 Motor connected, drive off
“3” 3 DC boost being applied
“4” 4 Motor running at [Dwell Frequency]
“5” 5 Motor accelerating
“6” 6 Motor at command speed
“7” 7 Motor decelerating
“8” 8 Motor coasting
“9” 9 Motor under DC braking
“10” 10 Waiting for fault reset – returns to 0
“11” 11 Start mode
“12” 12 Flying start search enable
“13” 13 Flying start w/encoder in process
5–32
Programming
Faults
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Flt Power Mode]
This parameter displays the power mode active at
the time of the last fault. These values can be
helpful in troubleshooting for a condition causing a
fault.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Fault Frequency]
This parameter stores and displays the last
[Output Freq] prior to a fault.
[Flt Driv Status]
This parameter stores and displays
the last [Drive Status] prior to a
fault.
Bits 0-7 are displayed on lower half
of line 2 on HIM display, while, bits
8-15 are displayed on the upper half
of line 2.
With drive software versions above
2.00 and a Series A (version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, a Status description
(bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
144
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“1” 1 Power up sequence in progress
“2” 2 Precharge in progress
“3” 3 Bus voltage being stored in memory
“4” 4 Ready for run cmnd. after power up
“5” 5 Power stage diagnostics running
“6” 6 Line loss detection occurred
“7” 7 Ready for run command after stop
“8” 8 Drive running
“9” 9 Motor flux decay delay
“10” 10 DC braking in progress
“11” 11 Drive fault occurred
“12” 12 Flying start search enabled
“13” 13 Deceleration in progress
“14” 14 SCR wake mode
“15” 15 SCR check mode
“16” 16 SCR wait mode
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
145
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq.
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
146
Read Only
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9
Reference
ID
Reference
Freq Select 1
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Freq Select 2
Adapter 1
Adapter 2
Adapter 3
Adapter 4
Adapter 5
Adapter 6
Jog Frequency
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
14
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
13
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
12
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
11
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
10
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
9
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Enabled
Running
Command Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
Actual Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
Accelerating
Decelerating
Local
Adapter ID
Local
TB3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Unused
Bit 4
Alarm
Faulted
At Speed
Programming
5–33
Faults
[Fault Alarms]
This parameter stores and displays
the last alarm conditions present
prior to a fault. Refer to Chapter 6
for further alarm information.
With drive software versions above
2.00 and a Series A (version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, a Status description
(bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9
173
Read Only
Bit 8
Auto Reset
Motor OL Trip
4-20 mA Loss
Voltage Check
Unused
Heatsink Temp
Auxiliary Input
Ground Warning
[Flt Clear Mode]
This parameter controls the method for clearing
faults.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bus Charging
Hardware Current Limit
Motoring Current Limit
Regenerating Current Limit
Regenerating Voltage Limit
Line Loss In Progress
Mtr Overload
Motor Stalled
39
Read and Write
“Enabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0 Faults cleared only by cycling power
“Enabled” 1 Faults cleared by issuing a valid
stop command (only through
TB3/HIM) or cycling power – refer to
Bit 3 of the Logic Control Structure
on page A–13
[Ground Warning]
Enables the Ground Warning fault when the drive
senses ground current in excess of 2 amperes
(approximate). Refer to Chapter 6 for further
information.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
204
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated
“Enabled” 1 Ground Warning Generated
5–34
Programming
This group of parameters contains values that can be helpful in explaining the operation of
the drive. Drive status, direction, control and alarm conditions as well as drive ratings are
included.
Diagnostics
[Drive Status]
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
This parameter displays the actual
operating condition in binary format.
Bits 0-7 are displayed on lower half
of line 2 on HIM display, while, bits
8-15 are displayed on the upper half
of line 2.
With drive software versions above
2.00 and a Series A (version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, a Status description
(bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9
Reference
ID
Reference
Freq Select 1
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Freq Select 2
Adapter 1
Adapter 2
Adapter 3
Adapter 4
Adapter 5
Adapter 6
Jog Frequency
This parameter displays the actual operating
condition in binary format.
Bits 0-7 are displayed on lower half of line 2
on HIM display, while, bits 8-15 are displayed
on the upper half of line 2.
With drive software versions above 4.01 and
a Series A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM, a
Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on
line 1.
This parameter displays which
alarm condition is present when bit
6 of [Drive Status] is high
(set to 1). Refer to Chapter 6 for
further alarm information.
With drive software versions above
2.00 and a Series A (version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, a Status description
(bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
14
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
13
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
12
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Local
TB3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Unused
11
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
10
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
9
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Alarm
Faulted
At Speed
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
At Freq
At Current
At Torque
Current Lmt
Mtr Overload
Line Loss
Auto Reset
Economize
Braking
Unused
Reverse Run
Forward Run
Drive Ready
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9
Bit 3
236
Read Only
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Bit 4
Enabled
Running
Command Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
Actual Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
Accelerating
Decelerating
Local
Adapter ID
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
[2nd Drive Sts]–Frm. 4.01 & later
[Drive Alarm]
59
Read Only
Drive Power
60
Read Only
Bit 8
Auto Reset
Motor OL Trip
4-20 mA Loss
Voltage Check
Unused
Heatsink Temp
Auxiliary Input
Ground Warning
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bus Charging
Hardware Current Limit
Motoring Current Limit
Regenerating Current Limit
Regenerating Voltage Limit
Line Loss In Progress
Mtr Overload
Motor Stalled
Programming
5–35
Diagnostics
[Latched Alarms]
This parameter “stores” the [Drive
Alarm] indications (see above). Bits
will remain set (high/1), even if the
alarm condition no longer exists.
The bit(s) must be programmed to
zero to release the stored
indications.
With drive software versions above
2.00 and a Series A (version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, a Status description
(bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
205
Read Only
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9
Bit 8
Auto Reset
Motor OL Trip
4-20 mA Loss
Voltage Check
Unused
Heatsink Temp
Auxiliary Input
Ground Warning
[Input Status]
This parameter displays the on/off status of inputs
1-8 at TB3 if an optional interface card is installed.
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
This parameter displays the frequency source
currently commanding the drive.
[Freq Command]
This parameter displays the frequency that the drive
is commanded to output. This command may come
from any one of the frequency sources selected by
[Freq Select 1] or [Freq Select 2].
[Drive Direction]
This parameter displays the commanded running
direction.
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bus Charging
Hardware Current Limit
Motoring Current Limit
Regenerating Current Limit
Regenerating Voltage Limit
Line Loss In Progress
Mtr Overload
Motor Stalled
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
55
Read Only
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Input 1 – TB3-19
Input 2 – TB3-20
Input 4 – TB3-23
Input 3 – TB3-22
Input 5 – TB3-24
Input 6 – TB3-26
Input 8 – TB3-28
Input 7 – TB3-27
With drive software versions above 2.00 and a
Series A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM, a Status
description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
[Freq Source]
Bit 7
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
62
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“Adapter 1-6” 6-11
“Preset 1-7” 12-18
“Use Last” 0
“Remote Pot” 1
“0-10 Volt” 2
“4-20 mA” 3
“Pulse Ref” 4
“MOP” 5
65
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
+ 400.00 Hz
69
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“Forward” 0
“Reverse” 1
5–36
Programming
Diagnostics
[Stop Mode Used]
This parameter displays the active stop mode.
[Motor Mode]
This parameter displays the motor mode.
[Power Mode]
This parameter displays the power mode.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
26
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“Coast” 0
“DC Brake” 1
“Ramp” 2
“S-Curve” 3
“Ramp to Hold” 4
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
141
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“1” 1 Power up sequence in progress
“2” 2 Motor connected, drive off
“3” 3 DC boost being applied
“4” 4 Motor running at [Dwell Frequency]
“5” 5 Motor accelerating
“6” 6 Motor at command speed
“7” 7 Motor decelerating
“8” 8 Motor coasting
“9” 9 Motor under DC braking
“10” 10 Waiting for fault reset – returns to 0
“11” 11 Start mode
“12” 12 Flying start search enable
“13” 13 Flying start w/encoder in process
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
142
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“1” 1 Power up sequence in progress
“2” 2 Precharge in progress
“3” 3 Bus voltage being stored in memory
“4” 4 Ready for run command after
power up
“5”
“6”
“7”
“8”
“9”
“10”
“11”
“12”
“13”
“14”
“15”
“16”
5 Power stage diagnostics running
6 Line loss detection occurred
7 Ready for run command after stop
8 Drive running
9 Motor flux decay delay
10 DC braking in progress
11 Drive fault occurred
12 Flying start search enabled
13 Deceleration in progress
14 SCR wake mode
15 SCR check mode
16 SCR wait mode
Programming
5–37
Diagnostics
[Output Pulses]
This parameter displays the number of output cycles
for the PWM waveform. The count rolls over at
65535.
[Current Angle]
Firmware Version 3.04 and below
This parameter displays the angle, in degrees, of
displacement between output voltage and output
current. The cosine of this number is an
approximation of output power factor.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
67
Read Only
1 Pulse / Pulses
None
0
65535
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
72
Read Only
1 Deg / 255 = 360 Deg
None
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
70
Read Only
1° C / Deg. C
None
0
255° C
Firmware Version 4.01 and higher
This parameter has no function.
[Heatsink Temp]
This parameter displays the heatsink temperature.
[Set Defaults]
Setting this parameter to “Defaults Init” resets all
parameters to their factory values.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
64
Read and Write
“Ready”
Display Drive
“Ready” 0 Display after function complete.
“Store to EE” 1
“Rcll frm EE” 2
“Default Init” 3 Resets all parameters to factory
settings.
[DC Bus Memory]
This parameter displays the nominal DC bus voltage
level. This value is used to determine line loss,
overvoltage, decel frequency and other points.
[EEPROM Cksum]–Firmware 4.01 & later
The value of this parameter provides a checksum
value that indicates a change in drive programming
has occurred.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
212
Read Only
1 Volt / Volts
Volts
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
172
Read Only
None
5–38
Programming
Ratings
[Drive Type]
This parameter displays a decimal number which
can be translated into the drive catalog number by
using the adjacent chart. Refer to Chapter 1 for an
explanation of the catalog numbers.
[Firmware Ver.]
This parameter displays the version number of the
drive firmware.
[Drive Rtd Volts]
This parameter displays the rated input voltage of
the drive.
[Rated Amps]
This parameter displays the rated output current of
the drive.
[Rated kW]
This parameter displays the rated kW of the drive.
[Rated CT Amps]
This parameter displays the rated output current of
the drive.
This group contains a number of “Read Only” parameters that display drive operating characteristics. This group will only be available with firmware versions 2.01 and above. Refer
to the “Diagnostics” group if your firmware is below 2.01.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display
8449
8450
8451
8452
8453
8454
8455
12552
12553
12554
12555
12556
12557
12558
12559
12560
12561
12562
12563
8705
8706
1336S– . . .
AQF05
AQF07
AQF10
AQF15
AQF20
AQF30
AQF50
A007
A010
A015
A020
A025
A030
A040
A050
A060
A075
A100
A125
BRF05
BRF07
61
Read Only
Display
8707
8708
8709
8710
8711
8712
8713
12808
12809
12810
12811
12812
12813
12824
12814
12815
12816
12825
12817
12818
12819
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
1336S– . . .
BRF10
BRF15
BRF20
BRF30
BRF50
BRF75
BRF100
B007
B010
B015
B020
B025
B030
BX040
B040
B050
BX060
B060
B075
B100
B125
Display
12826
12820
12821
12827
12838
12828
12829
12839
12822
12840
12830
12841
12832
12842
12823
12833
8963
8965
8966
8967
13064
1336S– . . .
BX150
B150
B200
B250
BP250
BX250
B300
BP300
B350
BP350
B400
BP400
B450
BP450
B500
B600
CWF10
CWF20
CWF30
CWF50
C007
71
Read Only
None / Version x 100
0.00
Parameter Number
147
Parameter Type
Read Only
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Volt / Volts
Display
Drive Rated Input Voltage
Parameter Number
170
Parameter Type
Read Only
Display Units / Drive Units
0.1 Amp / Amps x 10
Display
Drive Rated Output Amps
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
171
Read Only
kW / kW x 100
Drive Rated Output kW
Parameter Number
148
Parameter Type
Read Only
Display Units / Drive Units
0.1 Amp / Amps x 10
Display
Drive Rated Output Amps
Display
13065
13066
13067
13068
13069
13070
13071
13072
13073
13074
13075
13076
13077
13083
13091
13085
13078
13086
13088
13079
13089
1336S– . . .
C010
C015
C020
C025
C030
C040
C050
C060
C075
C100
C125
C150
C200
C250
CX300
C300
C350
C400
C450
C500
C600
Programming
5–39
Ratings
[Rated CT kW]
This parameter displays the rated CT kW of the
drive.
[Rated VT Amps]
This parameter displays the rated output current of
the drive.
[Rated VT kW]
This parameter displays the rated VT kW of the
drive.
Masks
Each mask contains a bit for each adapter.
Individual bits can be set to “Zero” to lockout
control by an adapter or set to “1” to permit an
adapter to have control.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
198
Read Only
0.1 Amp / Amps x 10
Drive Rated Amps
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
199
Read Only
kW / kW x 100
Drive Rated kW
This group of parameters contains binary masks for all control functions. The masks control
which adapters can issue control commands.
Mask
Bit 7
Bit 6
This parameter controls which adapters can issue
forward/reverse commands.
[Start Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can issue
start commands.
[Jog Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can issue
jog commands.
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TB3
Adapter 1
Adapter 2
Adapter 3
Adapter 4
Adapter 5
Adapter 6
Not Used
With drive software versions above 2.00 and a
Series A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM, a
Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on
line 1.
[Direction Mask]
149
Read Only
kW / kW x 100
Drive Rated Output kW
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
94
Read and Write
01111110
Display Drive
“0” 0 Deny Control
“1” 1 Permit Control
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
95
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0 Deny Control
“1” 1 Permit Control
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
96
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0 Deny Control
“1” 1 Permit Control
5–40
Programming
Masks
[Reference Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can select
an alternate reference; [Frequency Sel 1],
[Frequency Sel 2] or preset speeds.
[Accel Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can select
[Accel Time 1] and [Accel Time 2].
[Decel Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can select
[Decel Time 1] and [Decel Time 2]
[Fault Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can reset a
fault.
[MOP Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can issue
MOP commands to the drive.
[Logic Mask]
Determines which adapters can control the drive. If
the bit for an adapter is set to “0,” the adapter will
have no control functions except for stop. In addition, the adapter can be removed from the drive
while power is applied without causing a serial fault.
[Local Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters are allowed
to take exclusive control of drive logic commands
(except stop). Exclusive “local” control can only be
taken while the drive is stopped.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
97
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0 Deny Control
“1” 1 Permit Control
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
98
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0 Deny Control
“1” 1 Permit Control
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
99
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0 Deny Control
“1” 1 Permit Control
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
100
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0 Deny Control
“1” 1 Permit Control
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
101
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0 Deny Control
“1” 1 Permit Control
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
92
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0 Deny Control
“1” 1 Permit Control
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
93
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0 Deny Control
“1” 1 Permit Control
Programming
5–41
Masks
[Alarm Mask]
Controls which alarm conditions will
activate the alarm contact (refer to
Chapter 2 – TB2) and set the alarm
bit (bit 6) in [Drive Status].
With drive software versions above
2.00 and a Series A (version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, a Status description
(bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
206
Read and Write
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9
Bit 8
Auto Reset
Motor OL Trip
4-20 mA Loss
Voltage Check
Unused
Heatsink Temp
Auxiliary Input
Ground Warning
Owners
Each Owner Parameter contains a bit for each
adapter. The drive will set an adapter’s bit to “1”
when that adapter is issuing a logic command and
to “Zero” when no command is being issued.
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bus Charging
Hardware Current Limit
Motoring Current Limit
Regenerating Current Limit
Regenerating Voltage Limit
Line Loss In Progress
Mtr Overload
Motor Stalled
This group of parameters contains binary information to display which group of adapters
are issuing control commands.
Owners Display
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TB3
Adapter 1
Adapter 2
Adapter 3
Adapter 4
Adapter 5
Adapter 6
Not Used
With drive software versions above 2.00 and a
Series A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM, a Status
description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
[Stop Owner]
This parameter displays which adapters are
presently issuing a valid stop command.
[Direction Owner]
This parameter displays which adapter currently has
exclusive control of direction changes.
[Start Owner]
This parameter displays which adapters are
presently issuing a valid start command.
Bit 0
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
102
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0 Stop Input Not Present
“1” 1 Stop Input Present
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
103
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0 Non-Owner
“1” 1 Current Owner
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
104
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0 Start Input Not Present
“1” 1 Start Input Present
5–42
Programming
Owners
[Jog Owner]
This parameter displays which adapters are
presently issuing a valid jog command.
[Reference Owner]
This parameter displays which adapter currently has
the exclusive control of the selection of the
command frequency source.
[Accel Owner]
This parameter displays which adapter has
exclusive control of selecting [Accel Time 1] or
[Accel Time 2].
[Decel Owner]
This parameter displays which adapter has
exclusive control of selecting [Decel Time 1] or
[Decel Time 2].
[Fault Owner]
This parameter displays which adapter is presently
resetting a fault.
[MOP Owner]
This parameter displays which adapters are
currently issuing increases or decreases in MOP
Command Frequency.
[Local Owner]
This parameter displays which adapter has
requested exclusive control of all drive logic
functions. If an adapter is in local lockout, all other
functions (except stop) on all other adapters are
locked out and non-functional. Local control can only
be obtained when the drive is not running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
105
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0 Jog Input Not Present
“1” 1 Jog Input Present
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
106
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0 Non-Owner
“1” 1 Current Owner
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
107
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0 Non-Owner
“1” 1 Current Owner
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
108
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0 Non-Owner
“1” 1 Current Owner
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
109
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0 Non-Owner
“1” 1 Current Owner
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
110
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0 Non-Owner
“1” 1 Current Owner
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
179
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0 Non-Owner
“1” 1 Current Owner
Programming
5–43
This group of parameters contains the parameters needed for an optional communications
adapter to communicate with the drive.
Adapter I/O
These parameters determine the parameter number
to which PLC output data table or SCANport device
image information will be written. Refer to the A-B
Single Point Remote I/O Adapter manuals or other
SCANport device manual for data link information.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
1336 PLUS
111-118
Read and Write
Parameter # / Parameter #
SCANport Device
[Data In A1]
[Data In A2]
[Data In B1]
[Data In B2]
[Data In C1]
[Data In C2]
[Data In D1]
[Data In D2]
These parameters determine the parameter number
whose value will be read into the PLC input data
table or SCANport device image. Refer to the A-B
Single Point Remote I/O Adapter manuals or other
SCANport device manual for data link information.
[Data Out A1]
[Data Out A2]
[Data Out B1]
[Data Out B2]
[Data Out C1]
[Data Out C2]
[Data Out D1]
[Data Out D2]
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
1336 PLUS
119-126
Read and Write
Parameter # / Parameter #
SCANport Device
5–44
Programming
Process
Display
[Process 1 Par]
This parameter should be set to the number of the
parameter whose scaled value will be displayed on
Line 1 of the HIM Display Panel.
This group of parameters contains the parameters used to scale, in “User Units”, any drive
parameter for display on the HIM. Two scaled parameter values can be simultaneously
displayed when Process Mode is selected.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
127
Read and Write
Parameter # / Parameter #
1
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
128
Read and Write
Numeric / Scale x 100
+1.00
–327.68
+ 327.67
Parameter Number(s)
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
129-136
Read and Write
ASCII Code / ASCII Code
“Volts ”
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
180
Read and Write
Parameter # / Parameter #
54
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
181
Read and Write
Numeric / Scale x 100
+1.00
–327.68
+ 327.67
Parameter Number(s)
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
182-189
Read and Write
ASCII Code / ASCII Code
“Amps ”
The maximum process value that can be displayed
is 99,999.99. If this value is exceeded, a character
string of asterisks (****) will appear on the display.
[Process 1 Scale]
This value sets the scaling multiplier for
[Process 1 Par]. The displayed value will be:
[Process 1 Par] actual value
x [Process 1 Scale] value
Displayed Value
[Process 1 Txt 1-8]
Sets the “User Units” description for the value
determined by [Process 1 Par] and [Process 1 Scale].
This 8 character description will be shown on line 1 of
the display. Refer to the Character Map in Appendix A.
[Process 2 Par]
This parameter should be set to the number of the
parameter whose scaled value will be displayed on
Line 2 of the HIM Display Panel.
The maximum process value that can be displayed
is 99,999.99. If this value is exceeded, a character
string of asterisks (****) will appear on the display.
[Process 2 Scale]
This value sets the scaling multiplier for
[Process 2 Par]. The displayed value will be:
[Process 2 Par] actual value
x [Process 2 Scale] value
Displayed Value
[Process 2 Txt 1-8]
Sets the “User Units” description for the value
determined by [Process 2 Par] and [Process 2 Scale].
This 8 character description will be shown on line 2 of
the display. Refer to the Character Map in Appendix A.
Programming
Encoder
Feedback
[Speed Control]
This parameter selects the type of speed modulation
active in the drive.
This group of parameters contains all the parameters necessary to activate encoder feedback for closed loop operation.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
77
Read and Write
“Slip Comp” (“No Control” frn < 4.01)
Display Drive
“No Control” 0 Frequency regulation
“Slip Comp” 1 Slip compensation
“Speed Droop” 2 Negative slip compensation
“PLL” 3 Phase lock loop (requires frn < 4.01)
“Encoder Fdbk” 4 Encoder feedback–closed loop
“Droop + Reg” 5 Enc. fdbk.–closed loop w/ active droop
“P Jump” 6 Traverse function
“Process PI” 7 Closed loop PI control
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
152
Read and Write
“Pulse”
Display Drive
“Pulse” 0
“Quadrature” 1
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
46
Read and Write
Factor / Pulses per Rev
1024 PPR (64 PPR frn < 4.01)
1
4096
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Important: If encoder feedback closed loop speed
regulation is required, “Encoder Fdbk” must be
selected.
[Encoder Type]
This parameter contains the feedback encoder signal
type. The drive can accept single-ended, singlechannel (Pulse) or differential (Quadrature) signals.
This cannot be changed while drive is running.
[Pulse/Enc Scale]
This parameter contains the scaling factor for both
pulse train inputs (TB2-7, 8) and encoder feedback
speed regulation (TB3 terminals 31-36).
1. Encoder Feedback Operation
Enter actual encoder pulses per revolution
2. Pulse Train Input
Scale
Incoming Pulse Rate (Hz)
Motor Poles
=
x
Factor
Desired Command Freq.
2
[Maximum Speed]
This Parameter sets the output frequency at full
frequency reference for:
1. Encoder feedback speed regulation.
2. All analog inputs to TB2 (remote pot, 0-10V &
0-20 mA).
Pulse Train Example:
3840 Hz 4 Poles
Pulse/Enc Scale =
= 128
x
4 Pole Motor, 60 Hz = Max. Speed.
60 Hz
2
The 1336–MOD–N1 option outputs 64 Hz/Hz.
At full analog reference, the pulse output will This value will create a command frequency of
be 60 Hz x 64 Hz/Hz = 3840 pulses/sec.
60 Hz for full analog reference to the option.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
151
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
400 Hz
0 Hz
400 Hz
NOTE: [Maximum Freq.] must be raised to allow
operation or modulation above [Maximum Speed].
[Motor Poles]
This parameter contains the number of motor
magnetic poles. This value translates output
frequency into actual motor RPM during closed loop
operation. It is calculated from
[Motor NP Hertz] and [Motor NP RPM].
5–45
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
153
Read Only
1 Poles / Poles
5–46
Programming
Encoder Feedback
[Speed KI]
This parameter contains the integral gain value for
the velocity loop during closed loop operation.
[Speed Error]
This parameter displays the difference between
[Freq Command] and feedback speed.
[Speed Integral]
This parameter displays the integral value from the
speed loop.
[Speed Adder]
This parameter displays the amount of correction
applied to the [Freq Command].
[Motor NP RPM]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate
rated RPM.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
[Motor NP Hertz]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate
rated frequency.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
[Pulse/Enc Hertz]
This parameter displays the frequency command
present at pulse input terminals 7 & 8 of TB2 or at
the encoder input terminals on TB3 (if present). This
value is displayed whether or not this is the active
frequency command.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
165
Read and Write
Numeric / Gain x 100
100
0
20000
Parameter Number
166
Parameter Type
Read Only
Display Units / Drive Units
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq.
Factory Default
None
Minimum Value
– 8.33% of [Base Frequency]
Maximum Value
+ 8.33% of [Base Frequency]
Parameter Number
167
Parameter Type
Read Only
Display Units / Drive Units
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq.
Factory Default
None
Minimum Value
–8.33% of [Base Frequency]
Maximum Value
+ 8.33% of [Base Frequency]
Parameter Number
168
Parameter Type
Read Only
Display Units / Drive Units
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq.
Factory Default
None
Minimum Value
– 8.33% of [Base Frequency]
Maximum Value
+ 8.33% of [Base Frequency]
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
177
Read and Write
1 RPM / RPM x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
1750 RPM
60 RPM
24000 RPM
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
178
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
60 Hz
1 Hz
400 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
63
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
Programming
5–47
This group of parameters configures the Process PI Regulator.
Process PI
[Speed Control]
This parameter selects the type of speed modulation
active in the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
77
Read and Write
“Slip Comp” (“No Control” frn < 4.01)
Display Drive
“No Control” 0 Frequency regulation
“Slip Comp” 1 Slip compensation
“Speed Droop” 2 Negative slip compensation
“PLL” 3 Phase lock loop (requires frn < 4.01)
“Encoder Fdbk” 4 Encoder feedback–closed loop
“Droop + Reg” 5 Enc. fdbk.–closed loop w/ active droop
“P Jump” 6 Traverse function
“Process PI” 7 Closed loop PI control
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Important: If encoder feedback closed loop speed
regulation is required, “Encoder Fdbk” must be
selected.
[PI Config]
This parameter sets and displays the configuration
for the PI regulator.
Note: Reset Integrator (Int) is also available through
a digital input. See Input Mode Selection in Chapter
2.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
213
Read/Write
00000000
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Inv Error – Changes sign of PI Error
Reset Int – Holds KI at zero
Zero Clamp – Prevents bidirectional operation
Sqrt Fdbk – Uses square root of PI feedback value
Set Output 0 0 0 0 1 1
Preload Int 0 0 1 1 0 0
PI Enable 0 1 0 1 0 1
Diagram
1
2
3
Spare
Diagram 1
Diagram 2
Diagram 3
Feed forward effect for
more dynamic response
Output
Freq.
Preload
Command
Preload
PI
Output
Preload
Preload at Start
Better response for
well defined systems
Preload at Start
Preload
Time 0
3
6
Enable
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
0
Enable PI output integrates from zero – drive ramps to
regulated frequency.
Disable PI output is forced to zero – drive ramps to
unregulated frequency.
[PI Status]
This parameter displays the status of the Process PI
regulator.
3
6
9
12
15
Enable
Disable
18
21
24
27
30
0
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 2
Bit 1
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
Disable
Disable PI output is held at preload - drive ramps to
unregulated speed (min. preload).
Note:
214
Read Only
None
Bit 3
9
Enable PI output integrates from preload – drive
ramps from preload.
Disable PI output is forced to zero - drive ramps to
unregulated frequency.
Bit 6
6
Enable
Enable PI output steps to preload and integrates from
there – drive steps to preload and ramps from
there.
Bit 7
3
Disable
Bit 0
Enabled
Spares
Drive will step output equal to preload on start.
5–48
Programming
Process PI
[PI Ref Select]
The source of the PI reference is selected with this
parameter. The value from the selected reference is
the “set point” for the Process PI regulator.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
215
Read/Write
“Preset 1”
Display Drive
“Adapter 1” 6
“Adapter 2” 7
“Adapter 3” 8
“Adapter 4” 9
“Adapter 5” 10
“Adapter 6” 11
“Preset 1-7” 12-18
“Remote Pot” 1
“0-10 Volt” 2
“4-20 mA” 3
“Pulse Ref” 4
“MOP” 5
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
216
Read/Write
“0-10 Volt”
Display Drive
“Adapter 1” 6
“Adapter 2” 7
“Adapter 3” 8
“Adapter 4” 9
“Adapter 5” 10
“Adapter 6” 11
“Preset 1-7” 12-18
“Remote Pot” 1
“0-10 Volt” 2
“4-20 mA” 3
“Pulse Ref” 4
“MOP” 5
If using firmware version 4.01 and up, the drive is
capable of responding to a loss of the 4-20 mA
signal used as either a PI reference or PI feedback.
Response to loss of 4-20 mA signal is controlled by
programming and requires the following:
a) [Speed Control] must be set to “Process PI”
and
b) Either [PI Ref Select] or [PI Fdbk Select] must be
set to “4-20 mA.”
If both of the above conditions are met, the signal
loss response is controlled by the setting of [4-20
mA Loss Sel]. If this parameter is set to “Stop/Fault,”
loss of input will cause the drive to stop and issue a
Hertz Err Fault. Loss of input while any other setting
of [4-20 mA Loss Sel] is chosen will cause the drive
to activate the alarm bit (bit 6 of [Drive Status] and
bit 13 of [Drive Alarm]) and output programmed
[Minimum Freq].
No signal loss protection is offered for the 0-10V
input.
[PI Fdbk Select]
The source of the PI feedback is selected with this
parameter. It identifies the input point for the process
feedback device.
[PI Reference]
This parameter displays the current value of the
reference selected by [PI Ref Select].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
217
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
Programming
5–49
Process PI
[PI Feedback]
This parameter displays the current value of the
reference selected by [PI Fdbk Select].
[PI Error]
The value of the error calculated by the PI loop. This
value is the difference between [PI Reference] & [PI
Feedback] and determines the PI output.
[PI Output]
The current output of the PI loop is displayed with
this parameter. This output is used as the speed
command for process control or the speed adder for
process trim.
[KI Process]
This parameter sets the integral gain of the process
PI loop.
[KP Process]
This parameter sets the proportional gain of the
process PI loop.
[PI Neg Limit]
This parameter sets the lower (negative) limit of the
PI output.
[PI Pos Limit]
This parameter sets the upper (positive) limit of the
PI output.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
218
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
219
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
220
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
221
Read/Write
NA / NA
128
0
1024
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
222
Read/Write
NA / NA
256
0
1024
Parameter Number
223
Parameter Type
Read/Write
Display Units / Drive Units
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
Factory Default
–8.33% of [Maximum Freq]
Minimum Value
–400.00 Hz
Maximum Value
400.00 Hz
Parameter Number
224
Parameter Type
Read/Write
Display Units / Drive Units
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
Factory Default
+8.33% of [Maximum Freq]
Minimum Value
–400.00 Hz
Maximum Value
400.00 Hz
5–50
Programming
Process PI
[PI Preload] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the value used to preload the PI intergrator
when “Set Output” or “Preload Int” bits equal “1” in
[PI Config].
Parameter Number
225
Parameter Type
Read/Write
Display Units / Drive Units
0.01 Hertz / ±32767 = Maximum Freq
Factory Default
0.00 Hz
Minimum Value
– 8.33% of [Maximum Freq]
Maximum Value
+ 8.33% of [Maximum Freq]
PI Reference
Select
Integral Term = 0
pi reference
PI Reference
PI Feedback
Select
PI Error
PI + Clamp
√
pi feedback
PI Config.sqrt_fdbk
–1
+
–
PI Feedback
∑
+
Process KI
s
Speed
Adder
∑
+
PI Config.reset_int
PI Config.inv_error
PI – Clamp
Process KP
PI Output
PI Output
Parameter 65
Freq Command
+32767
Master Frequency Reference
+
Compute
Speed
Speed
Command
Accel
Control
Speed
Ramp
+
∑
0
Output Frequency
+32767
0
–32767
speed ramp>0
PI Config.zero_clamp
–32767
Programming
5–51
This group of parameters defines basic motor control and is only available with firmware
version 4.01 and up.
Motor Control
[Control Select] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Selects the motor control method for the drive. The
default setting provides full stator flux control that is
suitable for most applications.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Additional selections are offered to optimally tune
performance:
• Two volts/Hertz modes are available; one using
simple voltage boost and one for complete
configurability. These may be required for special
motors or unmatched multi-motor installations.
9
Read and Write
“Sens Vector”
Display Drive
“Economize” 0 Stator Flux control with Economize
“Sens Vector” 1 Stator Flux control
“Fixed Boost” 2 V/Hz w/programmed accel/run boost
“Full Custom” 3 V/Hz with full configuration
• The Economize mode offers all the advantages of
stator flux control plus the added feature of an
“auto-economizer.” If a motor remains lightly
loaded for a specified period of time, the drive will
attempt to reduce output voltage (and therefore
output kW) in order to reduce the energy
(operating) costs of the lightly loaded motor.
Full Custom
Fixed
Base Voltage
Base Frequency
Maximum
Base Voltage
Base Frequency
Maximum Voltage
Maximum Frequency
Motor Rated
Voltage
Voltage
Break Voltage
Break Frequency
Start Boost
B
Start Boost
A
Run Boost
0
0
0
Frequency
Motor Rated
Maximum
0
Frequency
Fan Select 1 & 2/No Boost
100%
Base
Voltage
No Boost
50%
42%
35%
Fan 2
Fan 1
0
0
50%
Base Frequency
[Flux Amps Ref] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Used in Sensorless Vector mode only – Sets the
value of amps required to maintain full motor flux. If
set to zero, the drive will use an internal value based
on [Motor NP Amps] and drive kW (HP). Refer to
Chapter 4 for setup information.
Parameter Number
192
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
0.1 Amp / 4096 = Drive Rated Amps
Factory Default
0.0 Amps
Minimum Value
0.0 Amps
Maximum Value
75.0% of Drive VT Rated Amps
100%
5–52
Programming
Motor Control
[IR Drop Volts] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Used in Sensorless Vector mode only – Sets the
value of volts dropped across the resistance of the
motor stator. If set to zero, the drive will use an
internal value based on motor F.L.A. and rated
voltage. Some motors (i.e. 6 pole, special, etc.) may
be particularly sensitive to the adjustment of this
parameter. Refer to the tuning procedure in Chapter
4 for further information.
[Flux Up Time] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the amount of time the drive will use to try and
achieve full motor stator flux. When a Start
command is issued, DC current at current limit level
is used to build stator flux before accelerating.
[Start Boost]
This parameter sets the DC start boost level for
acceleration when [DC Boost Select] is set to “Fixed”
or “Full Custom.”
[Run Boost]
This parameter sets the DC boost level for constant
speed level when [DC Boost Select] is set to “Fixed”.
[Boost Slope] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the slope of the volts/Hertz curve from zero
Hertz to the intersect point (see Fixed boost diagram
above). The slope is determined by multiplying:
Run Boost x Boost Slope = A
Start Boost x Boost Slope = B.
[Break Voltage]
Sets the voltage the drive will output at [Break
Frequency]. Combined with [Break Frequency], this
parameter determines the volts-per-Hertz pattern
between 0 and [Break Frequency].
[Break Frequency]
This parameter sets a midpoint frequency on a
custom volts-per-Hertz curve. Combined with [Break
Voltage], this value determines the volts-per-Hertz
ratio between 0 and [Break Frequency].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
194
Read and Write
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rated Volts
0 Volts
0 Volts
25% of Drive Rated Volts
200
Read and Write
0.1 Sec / Sec x 10
0.0 Sec
0.0 Sec
5.0 Sec
Parameter Number
48
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
Factory Default
0 Volts
Minimum Value
0 Volts
Maximum Value
9.5% of Drive Rated Voltage
Parameter Number
83
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
Factory Default
0 Volts
Minimum Value
0 Volts
Maximum Value
9.5% of Drive Rated Voltage
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
169
Read and Write
None
1.5
1.0
8.0
Parameter Number
50
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
Factory Default
25% of Drive Rated Voltage
Minimum Value
0 Volts
Maximum Value
50% of Drive Rated Voltage
Parameter Number
49
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
Factory Default
25% of [Maximum Freq]
Minimum Value
0 Hz
Maximum Value
120 Hz
Important: Please note the resolution change with Frn 4.01.
Programming
Motor Control
[Base Voltage]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate
rated voltage.
[Base Frequency]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate
rated frequency.
[Maximum Voltage]
This parameter sets the highest voltage the drive will
output.
Parameter Number
18
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
Factory Default
Drive Rated Volts
Minimum Value
25% of Drive Rated Voltage
Maximum Value
120% of Drive Rated Voltage
Parameter Number
17
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
Factory Default
60 Hz
Minimum Value
25 Hz
Maximum Value
400 Hz
Important: Please note the resolution change with Frn 4.01.
Parameter Number
20
Parameter Type
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
Factory Default
Drive Rated Volts
Minimum Value
25% of Drive Rated Voltage
Maximum Value
120% of Drive Rated Voltage
5–53
5–54
Linear List
Programming
This group lists all the parameters currently installed in your drive in numerical order. Refer
to the Appendix at the back of this manual for an alpha/numeric listing of all parameters.
Chapter
6
Chapter 6 provides information to guide the user in troubleshooting
the 1336 PLUS. Included is a listing and description of the various
drive faults (with possible solutions, when applicable) and alarms.
Fault Descriptions
Fault Display
The LCD display is used to indicate a fault by showing a brief text
statement relating to the fault (see figure below). The fault will be
displayed until “Clear Faults” is initiated or drive power is cycled. A
Series A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM will display a fault when it
occurs, no matter what state the display is in. In addition, a listing of
past faults can be displayed by selecting “Fault queue” from the
Control Status menu (see Chapter 3 for more information). Refer to
Table 6.A for a listing and description of the various faults. Table 6.B
provides a listing of faults by number.
Clearing a Fault
When a fault occurs, the cause must be corrected before the fault can
be cleared. After corrective action has been taken, simply cycling
drive power will clear the fault. Issuing a valid Stop command from
the HIM or Control Interface option (TB3) will also clear a fault if
the [Flt Clear Mode] parameter is set to “Enabled.” In addition, a
“Clear Faults” command can be issued anytime from a serial device
(if connected).
Contact Description
Refer to Figure 2.3 for a schematic representation of contacts
CR1-CR4. Contacts in Figure 2.3 are shown in an unpowered state.
When powered, the contacts will change state. For Example: During
normal operating conditions (no faults present, drive running), the
CR3 Fault contacts (default setting in firmware versions 4.01 & up)
at TB2-13 & 14 are open, and the contacts at TB2-14 & 15 are
closed. When a fault occurs, the state of these contacts will change.
6–2
Troubleshooting
Table 6.A
1336 PLUS Fault Descriptions
Name & Fault #
Adptr Freq Err
65
Auxiliary Fault
02
Description
The SCANport adapter that
was the selected frequency
reference sent a frequency
greater than 32767 to the drive.
The auxiliary input interlock is
open.
Action
Correct the problem that is causing
the SCANport adapter to send the
illegal frequency reference to the
drive.
If Control Interface option is
installed, check connections at
TB3-24. If option is not installed,
set [Input Mode] to “1.”
Replace Main Control Board or
complete drive as required.
BGND 10ms Over
51
Microprocessor loop fault.
Occurs if the 10ms background
task hasn’t been run in 15 ms.
Blwn Fuse Flt
58
If the difference between the
commanded voltage and the
measured voltage is greater
than 1/8 of rated voltage for 0.5
seconds, then a fault will be
issued indicating that the bus
fuse in 30 kW (40 HP) and up
drives has blown.
Locate cause, replace fuse.
Diag C Lim Flt
36
The drive output current has
exceeded the hardware current
limit and the [Cur Lim Trip En]
parameter was enabled.
Check programming of [Cur Lim
Trip En] parameter. Check for
excess load, improper DC boost
setting, DC brake volts set too high
or other causes of excess current.
Drive Fault Reset
22
Power-up has been attempted
with an Open Stop contact or
Closed Start contact.
Check/verify wiring and contact
operation.
Drive –> HIM
Error 1 – The checksum read
from the EEPROM does not
match the checksum calculated
from the EEPROM data.
1. Gate Drive Bd. replacement
(requires re-initialization).
2. Trouble reading EEPROM
during initialization.
Repeat operation. Replace HIM.
EE Init Value
54
Stored parameter value out of
range on initialization.
EEprom Checksum
66
The checksum read from the
EEPROM does not match the
checksum calculated from the
EEPROM data.
1. Reset to factory defaults & cycle
input power.
2. Check all connections to the
Power/Driver Bd. Replace the
board or complete drive as
needed.
1. Reset to factory defaults & cycle
input power.
2. Check all wire and cable connections to the Power Driver
Board. Replace Power Driver
Board or complete drive as
required.
EEprom Fault
32
EEPROM is being programmed
and will not write a new value.
FGND 10ms Over
52
Microprocessor loop fault.
Occurs if a 10ms interrupt is
pending before the current
interrupt is complete.
EE Init Read
53
1. Reset to factory defaults & cycle
input power.
2. Check all connections to Power/
Driver Board. Replace board or
complete drive as needed.
Check all wire and cable connections to the Main Control Board.
Replace Main Control Board or
complete drive as required.
Replace Main Control Board or
complete drive as required.
Troubleshooting
6–3
Name & Fault #
Ground Fault
13
Description
A current path to earth ground
in excess of 100A has been
detected at one or more of the
drive output terminals. NOTE: If
ground current exceeds 220%
of drive rated current,
“Overcurrent Flt” may occur
instead of Ground Fault.
Action
Check the motor and external
wiring to the drive output terminals
for a grounded condition.
Ground Warning
57
A current path to earth ground
in excess of 2A has been
detected at one or more of the
drive output terminals. See
[Ground Warning].
Check the motor and external
wiring to the drive output terminals
for a grounded condition.
Hertz Err Fault
29
This fault indicates that there is
not a valid operating frequency.
It can be caused by any of the
following:
1. [Maximum Freq] is less than
[Minimum Freq].
2. Skip frequencies and skip
bandwidth eliminate all
operating frequencies.
3. 4-20mA input signal speed
reference has been lost and
[4-20mA Loss Sel] is set for
“Stop-Fault.”
A frequency select parameter
has been programmed with an
out of range value.
Hertz Sel Fault
30
HIM –> Drive
Loop Overrn Flt
23
Error 1 – The checksum read
from the EEPROM does not
match the checksum calculated
from the EEPROM data.
Error 2 – Number of parameters in saved profile does not
equal master.
Error 3 – Download was attempted to a different type drive
(i.e. 1336–>1305).
Error 4 – Saved data not correct for new drive.
Error 5 – Drive is running while
attempting download.
An overrun of the 2.5ms control
loop has occurred.
1. Check [Minimum Freq] and
[Maximum Freq] parameters.
2. Check [Skip Freq 1], [Skip Freq
2], [Skip Freq 3] and [Skip Freq
Band] parameters.
3. Check for broken wires, loose
connections or transducer loss
at 4-20mA input, TB2.
Reprogram [Freq Select 1] and/or
[Freq Select 2] with a correct value.
If problem persists, replace Main
Control Board or complete drive.
Retry download. Replace HIM.
Retry download. Replace HIM.
Download can only take place with
same type drive.
Capabilities of drive different then
master drive. Reprogram param.
Stop drive, then perform download.
Check all connections to the
Power/Driver Board. Replace the
board or complete drive as needed.
Max Retries Fault
33
Drive unsuccessfully attempted
to reset a fault and resume
running for the programmed
number of [Reset/Run Tries].
Check fault buffer for fault code
requiring reset. Correct the cause
of the fault and manually clear by
pressing the local Stop key or
cycling the TB3 Stop input.
Motor Mode Flt
24
A fault has been detected
originating from the Control
Board.
Check all connections to the
Control Board. Replace the board,
Language Module or complete
drive as required.
6–4
Troubleshooting
Name & Fault #
Motor Stall Fault
06
Description
Current remained over 150% of
[Rated Amps] for more than 4
seconds.
Action
If the motor is drawing excessive
current (over 150%), the motor load
is excessive and will not allow the
drive to accelerate to set speed. A
longer accel time or a reduced load
may be required.
Check drive programming.
*1.[Maximum Voltage] parameter
must be greater than [Base
Voltage].
*2.[Maximum Freq] parameter must
be greater than [Base Frequency].
3. [Base Voltage] parameter must
be greater than [Start Boost].
4. If the [DC Boost Select] parameter is set to “Full Custom,” [Base
Voltage] must be greater than
[Break Voltage] and [Break
Voltage] must be greater than
[Start Boost].
Neg Slope Fault
35
Drive software detected a
portion of the volts/hertz curve
with a negative slope.
Open Pot Fault
09
An external pot is connected
and the common side of the pot
is open. The drive generates
this fault when the voltage
between TB2-2 and TB2-3
exceeds 3.9V DC.
A SCANport device requests a
Read or Write of a data type
not supported. This will also
occur if:
1. [Motor Type] is set to “Sync
PM” and [Stop Mode Used]
is set to “DC Brake”, or
2. [Motor Type] is set to “Sync
Reluc” or “Sync PM” and
[Speed Control] is set to
“Slip Comp”.
Overcurrent is detected in
instantaneous overcurrent trip
circuit.
Check the external potentiometer
circuit at TB2, terminals 1, 2 and 3
for an open circuit.
Overload Fault
07
Internal electronic overload trip.
An excessive motor load exists. It
must be reduced such that drive
output current does not exceed the
current set by the [Overload Amps]
parameter.
Overtemp Fault
08
Heat sink temperature exceeds
a predefined value of 90° C
(195° F).
Overvolt Fault
05
DC bus voltage exceeded
maximum value.
Phase U Fault
38
A phase to ground fault has
been detected between the
drive and motor in this phase.
Check for blocked or dirty heat sink
fins. Check that the ambient
temperature has not exceeded 40°
C (104° F).
Monitor the AC line for high line
voltage or transient conditions.
Bus overvoltage can also be
caused by motor regeneration.
Extend the decel time or install
dynamic brake option.
Check the wiring between the drive
and motor. Check motor for
grounded phase.
* Firmware versions before 2.01 only.
Op Error Fault
11
Overcurrent Flt
12
Check programming.
Check for a short circuit at the drive
output or excessive load conditions
at the motor.
Troubleshooting
6–5
Name & Fault #
Phase V Fault
39
Description
A phase to ground fault has
been detected between the
drive and motor in this phase.
Action
Check the wiring between the drive
and motor. Check motor for
grounded phase.
Phase W Fault
40
A phase to ground fault has
been detected between the
drive and motor in this phase.
Check the wiring between the drive
and motor. Check motor for
grounded phase.
P Jump Err Flt
37
Poles Calc Flt
50
Reserved for future use.
Generated if the calculated
value of [Motor Poles] is less
than 2 or greater than 32.
Check [Motor NP RPM] and [Motor
NP Hertz] programming.
Power Loss Fault
03
DC bus voltage remained
below 85% of nominal for
longer than 500ms. [Line Loss
Fault] parameter is set to
“enabled.”
Monitor the incoming AC line for
low voltage or line power
interruption.
Power Mode Fault
26
The internal power mode
variable received an incorrect
value.
Power Overload
64
Power Test Flt
46
The drive rating of 150% for 1
minute has been exceeded.
The internal power mode
variable received an incorrect
value.
Check all connections to the
Control Board. Replace the board,
Language Module or complete
drive as required.
Reduce load.
Precharge Fault
19
The precharge device was
open 20ms after the end of a
line loss condition or the bus
charging alarm remains on for
20 seconds (precharge did not
complete).
Precharge Open
56
The precharge circuit was
commanded to close, but was
detected to be open.
Check all connections to the
Power/Driver Board. Replace the
board or complete drive as needed.
See Chapter 1 for frame
definitions.
1.Frames A1, A2, A3 – Check the
precharge circuit. Replace the
precharge NTC or complete
drive as needed.
2. Frame B – Check the precharge
circuit. Replace the precharge
transistor, Power Driver Board or
complete drive as required.
3. All larger frames – Check the
precharge circuit. Replace the
input SCRs, SCR Firing Board,
Power Driver Board or complete
drive as needed.
See page 1–1 for frame definitions.
1.Frames A1, A2, A3 – Check the
precharge circuit. Replace the
precharge NTC or complete
drive as needed.
2. Frame B – Check the precharge
circuit. Replace the precharge
transistor, Power Driver Board or
complete drive as required.
3. All larger frames – Check the
precharge circuit. Replace the
input SCRs, SCR Firing Board,
Power Driver Board or complete
drive as needed.
6–6
Troubleshooting
Name & Fault #
Reprogram Fault
48
Description
The drive was commanded to
write default values to
EEPROM.
Action
1. Clear the fault or cycle power to
the drive.
2. Program the drive parameters
as needed.
Important: If [Input Mode] has
been changed from its original
value, power must be cycled before
the new value will take affect.
ROM or RAM Flt
68
Internal power-up ROM or RAM
tests have not executed
properly.
Check Language Module. Replace
Control Board or complete drive as
required.
Run Boost Fault
34
An attempt has been made to
set the [Run Boost] parameter
to a value greater than the
[Start Boost] parameter.
A SCANport adapter has been
disconnected and the [Logic
Mask] bit for that adapter is set
to “1.”
Verify that parameter has been
programmed correctly.
Serial Fault
10
1. If no adapter was intentionally
disconnected, check wiring to
the SCANport adapters. Replace wiring, SCANport expander, SCANport adapters, Main
Control Board or complete drive
as required.
2. If an adapter was intentionally
disconnected and the [Logic
Mask] bit for that adapter is set
to “1”, this fault will occur. To
guard against this fault occurring, set the [Logic Mask] bit for
the adapter to “0.”
Check load requirements and
[Current Limit] setting.
Shear Pin Fault
63
Programmed [Current Limit]
amps has been exceeded and
[Shear Pin Fault] is enabled.
Temp Sense Open
55
Undervolt Fault
04
Heat sink thermistor is open or
malfunctioning.
DC Bus voltage fell below the
minimum value (388V DC at
460V AC input). [Line Loss
Fault] and [Low Bus Fault] set
to “enabled.”
Check thermistor and connections.
UV Short Fault
41
Excessive current has been
detected between these two
output terminals.
Check the motor and external
wiring to the drive output terminals
for a shorted condition.
UW Short Fault
42
Excessive current has been
detected between these two
output terminals.
Check the motor and external
wiring to the drive output terminals
for a shorted condition.
VW Short Fault
43
Excessive current has been
detected between these two
output terminals.
Check the motor and external
wiring to the drive output terminals
for a shorted condition.
Xsistr Desat Flt
47
One or more of the output
transistors were operating in
the active region instead of
desaturation. This can be
caused by excessive transistor
current or insufficient base
drive voltage.
Check for damaged output
transistors. Replace output
transistors, Power Driver Board or
complete drive as needed.
(Frame Size C & Above)
Monitor the incoming AC line for
low voltage or line power
interruption.
Troubleshooting
Table 6.B
Fault Code Cross Reference
Fault #
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
19
22
23
24
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
46
47
48
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59-62
63
64
65
66
68
Display Name
Auxiliary Fault
Power Loss Fault
Undervolt Fault
Overvolt Fault
Motor Stall Fault
Overload Fault
Overtemp Fault
Open Pot Fault
Serial Fault
Op Error Fault
Overcurrent Flt
Ground Fault
Precharge Fault
Drive Fault Reset
Loop Overrn Flt
Motor Mode Flt
Power Mode Fault
Timeout Fault
Hertz Err Fault
Hertz Sel Fault
Timeout Fault
EEprom Fault
Max Retries Fault
Run Boost Fault
Neg Slope Fault
Diag C Lim Flt
P Jump Err Flt
Phase U Fault
Phase V Fault
Phase W Fault
UV Short Fault
UW Short Fault
VW Short Fault
Power Test Flt
Xsistr Desat Flt
Reprogram Fault
Pole Calc Fault
BGND 10ms Over
FGND 10ms Over
EE Init Read
EE Init Value
Temp Sense Open
Precharge Open
Ground Warning
Blwn Fuse Flt
Reserved for Future Use
Shear Pin Fault
Power Overload
Adptr Freq Err
EEprom Checksum
ROM or RAM Flt
Reset/Run
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
6–7
6–8
Alarms
Troubleshooting
Table 6.C presents a listing and description of the drive alarms.
Alarm status can be viewed by selecting the [Drive Alarm]
parameter. An active alarm will be indicated by its corresponding bit
being set to high (1). Any high bit (1) will energize CR4 (see
figure 2.3).
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9
60
Read Only
Bit 8
Auto Reset
Motor OL Trip
4-20 mA Loss
Voltage Check
Unused
Heatsink Temp
Auxiliary Input
Ground Warning
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bus Charging
Hardware Current Limit
Motoring Current Limit
Regenerating Current Limit
Regenerating Voltage Limit
Line Loss In Progress
Mtr Overload
Motor Stalled
Table 6.C
Alarm Conditions
Alarm Name
Bus Charging
Hardware Current Limit
Motoring Current Limit
Regenerating Current Limit
Regenerating Voltage Limit
Line Loss In Progress
Mtr Overload
Motor Stalled
Ground Warning
Auxiliary Input
Heatsink Temp
Voltage Check
4-20mA Loss
Motor OL Trip
Auto Reset
Description
Precharge of DC bus capacitors is in progress.
An alarm will be issued when 220% of drive rated current is
reached.
The value programmed for [Current Limit] has been
exceeded while in the motoring mode.
An alarm will be issued when the value set for [Current
Limit] has been exceeded while the motor is regenerating.
Bus limiting is active.
An alarm will be issued when the AC incoming voltage
drops below 20% of input or a 150 volt drop takes place.
At the present value of output amps, a motor overload trip
will eventually occur.
The drive output frequency folds to 0 Hz and current limit is
still active or voltage limit will not allow decel.
Ground current exceeds 2 amperes.
TB3 terminal 24 circuit is open.
Temperature of drive heatsink has exceeded its limit.
Voltage at drive output terminals is equal to, or greater than
10% of drive rated volts (i.e. 46V for 460V drive) when
Start command is issued and flying start is disabled. Drive
will not start until terminal voltage falls below 10% of drive
rating or flying start is enabled.
4-20mA signal lost.
This bit will be high when the motor overload function has
integrated high enough to cause a motor overload fault.
This bit is active regardless of the [Motor Overload] state
(enabled/disabled).
Drive is attempting to reset a fault using [Reset/Run Tries]
& [Reset/Run Time].
A
Appendix
Appendix A provides specifications and supplemental information
including a parameter cross reference and derate information.
Protection
AC Input Overvoltage Trip:
AC Input Undervoltage Trip:
Bus Overvoltage Trip:
Bus Undervoltage Trip:
Nominal Bus Voltage:
200-240V Drive
285V AC
138V AC
405V DC
200V DC
324V DC
380-480V Drive
570V AC
280V AC
810V DC
400V DC
648V DC
500-600V Drive
690V AC
343V AC
975V DC
498V DC
810V DC
Heat Sink Thermistor:
Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip.
Drive Overcurrent Trip
Software Current Limit:
Hardware Current Limit:
Instantaneous Current Limit:
20 to 160% of VT rated current.
180 to 250% of VT rated current (dependent on drive rating).
220 to 300% of VT rated current (dependent on drive rating).
Line transients:
up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991.
Control Logic Noise Immunity:
Showering arc transients up to 1500 volts peak 2.
Power Ride-Thru:
15 milliseconds at full load.
Logic Control Ride-Thru:
0.5 seconds minimum, 2 seconds typical.
Ground Fault Trip:
Phase-to-ground on drive output.
Short Circuit Trip:
Phase-to-phase on drive output.
Environment
Altitude:
1000 m (3300 ft) max. without derating.
Ambient Operating Temperature
IP00, Open:
IP20, NEMA Type 1 Enclosed:
IP54, NEMA Type 12 Enclosed:
IP65, NEMA Type 4 Enclosed:
0 to 50 degrees C (32 to 122 degrees F).
0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104 degrees F).
0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104 degrees F).
0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104 degrees F).
Storage Temperature (all constructions):
–40 to 70 degrees C (–40 to 158 degrees F).
Relative Humidity:
5 to 95% non-condensing.
Shock:
15G peak for 11ms duration (±1.0ms).
Vibration:
0.006 inches (0.152 mm) displacement, 1G peak.
Agency Certification:
LI
ND 
CONT E
Q
LI
6
ND 
CONT E
ED 56L
ST
I
1 Note: Installation guidelines called out in Appendix C must be adhered to.
2 Excludes Pulse Train Input.
6
Marked for all applicable directives 1
Emissions
EN 50081-1
EN 50081-2
EN 55011 Class A
EN 55011 Class B
Immunity
EN 50082-1
EN 50082-2
IEC 801-1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 per EN 50082-1, 2
Low Voltage EN 60204-1
PREN 50178
ED 56L
ST
I
U.L. Listed
CSA Certified
Q
Specifications
A–2
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Electrical
Input Data
Voltage Tolerance:
Frequency Tolerance:
Input Phases:
–10% of minimum, +10% of maximum.
48-62 Hz.
Three-phase input provides full rating for all drives.
Single-phase operation is possible for A & B Frame drives
at a derating of 50%.
Displacement Power Factor
A1-A3 Frame Drives:
A4 Frame & Up Drives:
0.80 standard, 0.95 with optional inductor.
0.95 standard.
Efficiency:
97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts.
Max. Short Circuit Current Rating: 200,000A rms symmetrical, 600 volts (when used with AC
input line fuses specified in Chapter 2).
Control
Method:
A Frame Drives
B Frame Drives
C & D Frame Drives
E Frame Drives & Up
Output Voltage Range:
Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency. Ratings
apply to all drives (refer to the Derating Guidelines on page A–5).
2-10 kHz. Drive rating based on 4 kHz (see pg. 1–1 for frame info).
2-8 kHz. Drive rating based on 4 kHz (see pg. 1–1 for frame info).
2-6 kHz. Drive rating based on 4 kHz (see pg. 1–1 for frame info).
2-6 kHz. Drive rating based on 2 kHz (see pg. 1–1 for frame info).
0 to rated voltage.
Output Frequency Range: 0 to 400 Hz.
Frequency Accuracy
Digital Input:
Analog Input:
Within ±0.01% of set output frequency.
Within ±0.4% of maximum output frequency.
Selectable Motor Control:
Sensorless Vector with full tuning. Standard V/Hz with full custom
capability.
Accel/Decel:
Two independently programmable accel and decel times. Each
time may be programmed from 0 - 3600 seconds 1 in 0.1 second
increments 2.
Intermittent Overload:
Constant Torque – 150% of rated output for 1 minute.
Variable Torque – 115% of rated output for 1 minute.
Current Limit Capability:
Proactive Current Limit programmable from 20 to 160% of rated
output current. Independently programmable proportional and integral gain.
Inverse Time Overload Cap. Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response. Investigated by
U.L. to comply with N.E.C. Article 430. U.L. File E59272, volume 4/6.
1
2
600 seconds with Firmware Versions before 4.01.
0.1 second increments using a HIM or 0.01 with serial communications.
Input/Output Ratings
Each 1336 PLUS Drive has constant and variable torque capabilities. The
listings on the next page provide input & output current and kVA ratings.
Note: Drive ratings are at nominal values. See Derating Guidelines
on page A–5.
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Constant Torque
Input kVA
Input Amps
Output kVA
Output Amps
Variable Torque
Input kVA
Input Amps
Output kVA
Output Amps
1.1
1.4
2.2
2.9
3.9
5.7
8.5
2.8
3.5
5.4
7.3
9.7
14.3
21.3
0.9
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.2
4.8
7.2
2.3
3.0
4.5
6.0
8.0
12
18
1.1
1.4
2.2
2.9
3.9
5.7
8.5
2.8
3.5
5.4
7.3
9.7
14.3
21.3
0.9
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.2
4.8
7.2
2.3
3.0
4.5
6.0
8.0
12
18
A007
A010
A015
A020
A025
A030
A040
A050
A060
A075
A100
A125
380-480V DRIVES
BRF05
BRF07
BRF10
BRF15
BRF20
BRF30
BRF50
BRF75
BRF100
10-12
12-14
17-20
22-26
26-31
27-33
41-49
52-62
62-74
82-99
100-120
112-134
28
35
49
63
75
79
119
149
178
238
289
322
11
14
19
26
31
32
48
60
72
96
116
129
27
34
48
65
77
80
120
150
180
240
291
325
10-12
12-14
17-20
22-26
26-31
27-33
41-49
52-62
62-74
82-99
100-120
112-134
28
35
49
63
75
79
119
149
178
238
289
322
11
14
19
26
31
32
48
60
72
96
116
129
27
34
48
65
77
80
120
150
180
240
291
325
0.9-1.0
1.3-1.6
1.7-2.1
2.2-2.6
3.0-3.7
4.2-5.1
6.6-8.0
9.5-11.6
12.2-14.7
1.3
2.0
2.6
3.3
4.6
6.4
10.0
14.5
18.5
0.9
1.3
1.7
2.2
3.0
4.2
6.7
11.2
13.9
1.1
1.6
2.1
2.8
3.8
5.3
8.4
14.0
17.5
0.9-1.1
1.4-1.7
1.8-2.2
2.3-2.8
3.2-3.8
4.7-5.7
7.0-8.5
12.2-14.7
17.1-20.7
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.5
4.8
7.2
10.7
18.5
26.0
1.0
1.4
1.8
2.4
3.2
4.8
7.2
13.9
19.9
1.2
1.7
2.3
3.0
4.0
6.0
9.0
17.5
25.0
B007
B010
B015
B020
B025
B030
BX040
B040
B050
BX060 1
B060
B075
B100
B125
BX150
B150
B200
B250
BP250
BX250
B300
BP300
B350
BP350
B400
BP400
B450
BP450
B500
B600
500-600V DRIVES
CWF10
CWF20
CWF30
CWF50
C007
C010
C015
C020
C025
C030
C040
C050
C060
C075
C100
C125
C150 2
C200 2
C250
CX300
C300
C350
C400
C450 2
C500 2
C600 2
8-11
11-14
16-21
21-26
26-33
30-38
40-50
38-48
48-60
62
54-68
69-87
90-114
113-143
148
130-164
172-217
212-268
212-268
212-268
228-288
235-297
261-330
277-350
294-371
310-392
326-412
347-438
372-470
437-552
13
17
25
32
40
46
61
58
73
75
82
105
137
172
178
197
261
322
322
322
347
357
397
421
446
471
496
527
565
664
10
13
19
25
31
36
47
48
60
61
68
84
110
138
143
159
210
259
259
259
279
287
319
339
359
378
398
424
454
534
12.5
16.1
24.2
31
39
45
59
60
75
77
85
106
138
173
180
199
263
325
325
325
360
360
425
425
475
475
525
532
590
670
9-12
14-18
18-23
23-29
28-36
32-41
40-50
41-52
49-62
62
61-77
78-99
98-124
117-148
148
157-198
191-241
212-268
235-297
228-288
261-330
277-350
294-371
310-392
326-412
347-438
372-470
347-438
437-552
437-552
14
22
28
35
43
49
61
63
75
75
93
119
149
178
178
238
290
322
357
347
397
421
446
471
496
527
565
527
664
664
11
17
22
27
33
38
47
52
61
61
76
96
120
143
143
191
233
259
287
279
319
339
359
378
398
424
454
424
534
534
14
21
27
34
42
48
59
65
77
77
96
120
150
180
180
240
292
325
360
360
425
425
475
475
525
532
590
532
670
670
2.1-2.5
4.2-5.0
6.2-7.5
8.3-10.0
9-11
11-13
17-20
21-26
27-32
31-37
38-45
48-57
52-62
73-88
94-112
118-142
144-173
216-260
244-293
256-307
258-309
301-361
343-412
386-464
429-515
515-618
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
10
12
19
25
31
36
44
55
60
84
108
137
167
250
282
295
297
347
397
446
496
595
2.1
4.2
6.2
8.3
10
12
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
85
109
137
167
252
283
297
299
349
398
448
498
598
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10
12
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
85
109
138
158
252
284
300
300
350
400
450
500
600
2.1-2.5
4.2-5.0
6.2-7.5
8.3-10.0
9-11
11-13
17-20
21-26
27-32
31-37
38-45
48-57
52-62
73-88
94-112
118-142
144-173
216-260
244-293
256-307
258-309
301-361
343-412
386-464
429-515
515-618
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
10
12
19
25
31
36
44
55
60
84
108
137
167
250
282
295
297
347
397
446
496
595
2.1
4.2
6.2
8.3
10
12
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
85
109
137
167
251
283
297
299
349
398
448
498
598
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10
12
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
85
109
138
158
252
284
300
300
350
400
450
500
600
Cat. No.
200-240V DRIVES
AQF05
AQF07
AQF10
AQF15
AQF20
AQF30
AQF50
1
2
A–3
480 Volts Only.
In firmware versions 2.04 and below, the factory default PWM frequency is 4 kHz. Drive must be reprogrammed to 2 kHz to achieve current ratings listed.
A–4
Specifications and Supplemental Information
User Supplied Enclosures
1
2
3
4
5
6
Base Derate Amps are based on nominal
voltage (240, 480 or 600V). If input voltage
exceeds Drive Rating, Drive Output must be
derated. Refer to Figure CC.
Rating is at 4 kHz (2 kHz for 224–448
kW/300–600 HP, 500–600V). If carrier
frequencies above 4 kHz are selected, drive
rating must be derated. See Figures A–AA.
Drive Ambient Temperature Rating is 40° C. If
ambient exceeds 40° C, the drive must be
derated. Refer to Figures A–AA.
Drive Rating is based on altitudes of 1,000 m
(3,000 ft) or less. If installed at higher altitude,
drive must be derated Refer to Figure BB.
Important: Two (2) 725 CFM fans are required
if an open type drive is mounted in a user
supplied enclosure.
Not available at time of printing.
1336 plus drives installed in user supplied enclosures may be mounted
within an enclosure or may be mounted to allow the heat sink to
extend outside the enclosure. Use the information below in
combination with the enclosure manufacturer’s guidelines for sizing.
Base Derate
Cat No.
Amps 1
200-240V DRIVES
AQF05
2.3
AQF07
3.0
AQF10
4.5
AQF15
6.0
AQF20
8.0
AQF30
12
AQF50
18
A007
27
A010
34
A015
48
A020
65
A025
77
A030
80
A040
120
A050
150
A060
180
A075
240
A100
291
A125
325
380-480V DRIVES
BRF05
1.2
BRF07
1.7
BRF10
2.3
BRF15
3.0
BRF20
4.0
BRF30
6.0
BRF50
9.0
BRF75
17.5
BRF100
25.0
B007
14
B010
21
B015
27
B020
34
B025
42
B030
48
BX040
59
B040
65
B050
77
BX060
77
B060
96
B075
120
B100
150
B125
180
BX150
180
B150
240
B200
292
B250
325
BP250
322
BX250
360
B300
425
BP300
357
B350
475
BP350
421
B400
525
BP400
471
B450
590
BP450
527
B500 5
670
670
B600 5
500-600V DRIVES
CW10
2.4
CW20
4.8
CW30
7.2
CW50
9.6
C007
10
C010
12
C015
19
C020
24
C025
30
C030
35
C040
45
C050
57
C060
62
C075
85
C100
109
C125
138
C150
158
C200
252
C250
284
CX300
300
5
C300
300
350
C350 5
400
C400 5
5
450
C450
500
C500 5
5
600
C600
Derate
Curve 2, 3
Heat Dissipation
Drive Watts 2, 3, 4
Heat Sink
Watts 2
Total
Watts 2
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
None
Figure B
Figure D
None
None
None
Figure G
Figure H
Figure J
Figure L
Figure M
Figure N
13
15
17
21
25
33
42
156
200
205
210
215
220
361
426
522
606
755
902
15
21
32
42
56
72
116
486
721
819
933
1110
1110
1708
1944
2664
2769
3700
4100
28
36
49
63
81
105
158
642
921
1024
1143
1325
1330
2069
2370
3186
3375
4455
5002
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
None
None
None
Figure B
Figure C
Figure D
Figure E
Figure E
Figure F
Figure F
None
Figure G
Figure H
Figure J
Figure J
Figure L
Figure M
Figure N
Figure O
None
None
Figure P
None
Figure Q
None
Figure R
None
Figure S
Figure T
Figure T
12
13
15
16
19
23
29
70
89
91
103
117
140
141
141
175
175
193
193
361
361
426
522
606
606
755
902
491
902
1005
619
1055
733
1295
793
1335
931
1395
1485
9
15
20
27
36
54
84
230
331
270
394
486
628
720
820
933
933
1110
1110
1708
1708
1944
2664
2769
2769
3700
4100
4658
4100
4805
5342
5455
6039
6175
6329
6875
7000
7525
8767
21
28
35
43
55
77
113
300
420
361
497
603
768
861
961
1108
1108
1303
1303
2069
2069
2370
3186
3375
3375
4455
5002
5149
5002
5810
5961
6510
6772
7470
7122
8210
7931
8920
10252
Figure U
Figure U
Figure U
Figure U
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
25
29
32
35
91
103
117
140
141
141
175
193
193
361
426
522
606
755
890
940
926
1000
1430
1465
1500
1610
29
57
87
117
217
251
360
467
492
526
678
899
981
1533
1978
2162
2315
3065
3625
3990
5015
5935
7120
8020
8925
10767
54
86
119
152
308
354
477
607
633
667
853
1092
1174
1894
2404
2683
2921
3820
4515
4930
5941
6935
8550
9485
10425
12377
6
Figure G
Figure I
Figure K
Figure V
Figure W
Figure X
Figure Y
Figure Z/AA
Figure Z/AA
Figure Z/AA
Figure Z/AA
Figure Z/AA
Figure Z/AA
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Derating Guidelines
A–5
Drive ratings can be affected by a number of factors. If more than
one factor exists, derating percentages must be multiplied. For
example, if a 42 Amp drive (B025) running at 8 kHz is installed at a
2,000 m (6,600 ft.) altitude and has a 2% high input line voltage, the
actual amp rating will be:
42 x 94% Altitude Derate x 96% High Line Derate = 37.9 Amps.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE / CARRIER FREQUENCY
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in
40°C Ambient & Open Drive in 50°C Ambient.
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in
Ambient between 41°C & 50°C.
100%
Figure A
1336S-AQF05-AQF50 and BRF05-BRF100
98%
% of Drive 96%
Rated Amps 94%
92%
90%
2
4
6
8
10
12
Carrier Frequency in kHz
100%
Figure B
1336S-A010 and B020
98%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
96%
94%
92%
90%
2
4
6
8
Carrier Frequency in kHz
100%
Figure C
1336S-B025
96%
% of Drive 92%
Rated Amps 88%
84%
80%
2
4
6
8
Carrier Frequency in kHz
100%
95%
Figure D
1336S-A015 and B030
90%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
6
8
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure E
1336S-B040 and BX040
100%
98%
96%
% of Drive 94%
Rated Amps 92%
90%
88%
86%
2
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
A–6
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in
40°C Ambient & Open Drive in 50°C Ambient.
Figure F
1336S-B050 and BX060
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in
Ambient between 41°C & 50°C.
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure G
1336S-A040, B075, C075
100%
98%
% of Drive 96%
Rated Amps 94%
92%
90%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure H
1336S-A050, B100
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure I
1336S-C100
100%
98%
% of Drive 96%
Rated Amps 94%
92%
90%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure J
1336S-A060, B125, BX150
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure K
1336S-C125
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
(40%) 6
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in
40°C Ambient & Open Drive in 50°C Ambient.
Figure L
1336S-A075, B150
A–7
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in
Ambient between 41°C & 50°C.
100%
96%
% of Drive 92%
Rated Amps 88%
84%
80%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure M
1336S-A100, B200
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure N
1336S-A125, B250
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
(60%) 6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure O
1336S-BP250
100%
96%
% of Drive 92%
Rated Amps 88%
84%
80%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure P
1336S-BP300
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure Q
1336S-BP350
100%
90%
% of Drive 80%
Rated Amps 70%
60%
50%
2
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
A–8
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in
40°C Ambient & Open Drive in 50°C Ambient.
Figure R
1336S-BP400
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in
Ambient between 41°C & 50°C.
100%
90%
% of Drive 80%
Rated Amps 70%
60%
50%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure S
1336S-BP450
100%
90%
% of Drive 80%
Rated Amps 70%
60%
50%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure T
1336S-B500 and B600
Assumes two (2) 725 CFM cooling fans for
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) enclosure
100%
90%
60 Hz
% of Drive 80%
Rated Amps 70%
50 Hz
60 Hz
60%
50 Hz
50%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure U
1336S-CW10 through CW50
100%
98%
% of Drive 96%
Rated Amps 94%
Not
Recommended
92%
90%
2
4
6
8
10
12
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure V
1336S-C150
100%
95%
90%
% of Drive 85%
Rated Amps 80%
75%
70%
65%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure W
1336S-C200
100%
90%
80%
% of Drive 70%
Rated Amps
60%
50%
40%
2
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in
40°C Ambient & Open Drive in 50°C Ambient.
A–9
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in
Ambient between 41°C & 50°C.
100%
Figure X
1336S-C250
90%
80%
% of Drive 70%
Rated Amps
60%
50%
40%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
100%
Figure Y
1336S-CX300
90%
80%
% of Drive 70%
Rated Amps
60%
50%
40%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
100%
Figure Z
1336S-C300 through C600
Enclosed Drive in 40° C Ambient
90%
80%
C300
% of Drive 70%
Rated Amps
C350
C400
C450
C500
C600
60%
Assumes two (2) 725 CFM cooling fans for
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) enclosure
50%
40%
2
4
6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
Figure AA
1336S-C300 through C600
Enclosed Drive in 41° - 50° C Ambient
Assumes two (2) 725 CFM cooling fans for
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) enclosure
6kHZ Data Not Available at Time of Printing
100%
C300/
C350
C400
90%
80%
C450
C500
% of Drive 70%
Rated Amps
60%
C600
50%
40%
2
3
Carrier Frequency in kHz
4
ALTITUDE AND HIGH INPUT VOLTAGE
Figure CC
High Input Voltage – Required Only for the following drives:
Figure BB
Altitude – All Drive Ratings
1336S-x025 – 18.5 kW (25 HP) at 8 kHz
1336S-x030 – 22 kW (30 HP) at 6 or 8 kHz
1336S-x060 – 45 kW (60 HP) at 6 kHz
100%
100%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
% of Drive
Rated Amps
90%
90%
80%
80%
0
1,000
(3,300)
2,000
(6,600)
Altitude
3,000
(9,900)
m
4,000
(13,200) (ft)
240, 480 or 600V Nominal
+2%
+4%
+6%
Input Voltage
+8%
+10%
A–10
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Parameter Cross
Reference – By Number
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
Name
Output Voltage
% Output Curr
% Output Power
Last Fault
Freq Select 1
Freq Select 2
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
DC Boost Select
Control Select 4.01
Stop Select 1
Bus Limit En
DC Hold Time
DC Hold Level
Run On Power Up
Reset/Run Time
Minimum Freq
Base Frequency
Base Voltage
Maximum Freq
Maximum Voltage
Input Mode
MOP Increment
Output Power
Jog Frequency
Analog Out Sel
Stop Mode Used
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Skip Freq 1
Skip Freq 2
Skip Freq 3
Skip Freq Band
Current Limit
Overload Mode
Overload Amps
Flt Clear Mode
Line Loss Fault
Motor Type
Slip @ F.L.A.
Dwell Frequency
Dwell Time
PWM Frequency
Pulse/Enc Scale
Language
Start Boost
Break Frequency
Break Voltage
Clear Fault
Stop Select 2
DC Bus Voltage
Output Current
Input Status
S Curve Time
S Curve Enable
Drive Status
Drive Alarm
Drive Type
Freq Source
Pulse/Enc Hertz
Set Defaults
Freq Command
Output Freq
Output Pulses
Drive Direction
Heatsink Temp
Firmware Ver.
Current Angle
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Speed Control
Group
Metering
Metering
Metering
Metering
Setup + Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Setup
Setup
Advanced Setup ➁
Motor Control
Setup + Adv. Setup
Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup
Feature Select
Feature Select
Setup + Adv. Setup
Setup + Adv. Setup ➁
Setup + Adv. Setup ➁
Setup + Adv. Setup
Setup + Adv. Setup ➁
Setup + I/O Config 4.01
Frequency Set
Metering
Frequency Set
I/O Config
Diagnostics
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Setup
Setup
Setup
Faults
Faults
Advanced Setup
Feature Select
Feature Select
Feature Select
Advanced Setup
Freq. Set + Enc. Fdbk.
Feature Select
Advanced Setup ➁
Advanced Setup ➁
Advanced Setup ➁
Faults
Advanced Setup
Metering
Metering
Diagnostics
Feature Select
Feature Select
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Ratings ➀
Diagnostics
Meter. + Enc. Fdbk. 2.01
Diagnostics
Metering + Diagnostics
Metering
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Metering + Diagnostics
Ratings ➀
Diagnostics
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Enc. Fdbk. + Process PI
No.
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
Name
Traverse Period
Max Traverse
P Jump
Blwn Fuse Flt
Cur Lim Trip En
Run Boost
Analog Invert
Power OL Count 4.01
85
Reset/Run Tries
86
Fault Buffer 0
87
Fault Buffer 1
88
Fault Buffer 2
89
Fault Buffer 3
90
Analog Trim En
91
Low Bus Fault
92
Logic Mask
93
Local Mask
94
Direction Mask
95
Start Mask
96
Jog Mask
97
Reference Mask
98
Accel Mask
99
Decel Mask
100
Fault Mask
101
MOP Mask
102
Stop Owner
103
Direction Owner
104
Start Owner
105
Jog Owner
106
Reference Owner
107
Accel Owner
108
Decel Owner
109
Fault Owner
110
MOP Owner
111
Data In A1
112
Data In A2
113
Data In B1
114
Data In B2
115
Data In C1
116
Data In C2
117
Data In D1
118
Data In D2
119
Data Out A1
120
Data Out A2
121
Data Out B1
122
Data Out B2
123
Data Out C1
124
Data Out C2
125
Data Out D1
126
Data Out D2
127
Process 1 Par
128
Process 1 Scale
129-136 Process 1 Txt 1-8
137
MOP Hertz
138
Pot Hertz
139
0-10 Volt Hertz
140
4-20 mA Hertz
141
Motor Mode
142
Power Mode
143
Flt Motor Mode
144
Flt Power Mode
145
Fault Frequency
146
Flt Driv Status
147
Drive Rtd Volts
148
Rated CT Amps
149
Rated CT kW
150
4-20 mA Loss Sel
151
Maximum Speed
152
Encoder Type
153
Motor Poles
154
Anlg Out Offset
155
Flying Start En
156
FStart Forward
157
FStart Reverse
158
Digital Out Sel
Group
Feature Select
Feature Select
Feature Select
Faults
Faults
Advanced Setup ➁
Advanced Setup
Metering
Feature Select
Faults
Faults
Faults
Faults
Advanced Setup
Faults
Masks
Masks
Masks
Masks
Masks
Masks
Masks
Masks
Masks
Masks
Owners
Owners
Owners
Owners
Owners
Owners
Owners
Owners
Owners
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Process Display
Process Display
Process Display
Metering
Metering
Metering
Metering
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Faults
Faults
Faults
Faults
Ratings ➀
Ratings ➀
Ratings ➀
Advanced Setup
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
I/O Config
Feature Select
Feature Select
Feature Select
I/O Config
No.
158
159
160
161
162
163
165
166
167
168
169
Name
CR1 Out Select 4.01
Dig Out Freq
Dig Out Current
Dig Out Torque
Torque Current
Flux Current
Speed KI
Speed Error
Speed Integral
Speed Adder
Run/Accel Boost 2.01
Boost Slope 4.01
170
Rated Amps
171
Rated kW
172
EEPROM Cksum 4.01
173
Fault Alarms
174-176 CR2-4 Out Select 4.01
177
Motor NP RPM
178
Motor NP Hertz
179
Local Owner
180
Process 2 Par
181
Process 2 Scale
182-189 Process 2 Txt 1-8
190
Motor NP Volts 4.01
191
Motor NP Amps 4.01
192
KI Amps 2.03
Flux Amps Ref 4.01
193
KP Amps 2.03
194
KI Volts
IR Drop Volts 4.01
195
Slip Comp Gain 4.01
196
KP Volts
198
Rated VT Amps
199
Rated VT kW
200
Flux Up Time 4.01
201
Motor OL Fault 4.01
202
Motor OL Count 4.01
203
VT Scaling
204
Ground Warning 2.01
205
Latched Alarms 2.01
206
Alarm Mask 2.01
207
Fault Data 4.01
208
Time Data 1
209
Time Data 3
210
Time Data 5
211
Time Data 7
212
DC Bus Memory
213
PI Config 3.01
214
PI Status 3.01
215
PI Ref Select 3.01
216
PI Fdbk Select 3.01
217
PI Reference 3.01
218
PI Feedback 3.01
219
PI Error 3.01
220
PI Output 3.01
221
KI Process 3.01
222
KP Process 3.01
223
PI Neg Limit 3.01
224
PI Pos Limit 3.01
225
PI Preload 4.01
226
Shear Pin Fault 4.01
227
Adaptive I Lim 4.01
228
LLoss FStart 4.01
229
Freq Ref SqRoot 4.01
230
Save MOP Ref 4.01
231
Hold Level Sel 4.01
232
Current Lmt Sel 4.01
233
Abs Analog Out 4.01
234
Set Anlg Out Lo 4.01
235
Set Anlg Out Hi 4.01
236
2nd Drive Sts 4.01
237
Set 0-10 Vlt Lo 4.01
238
Set 0-10 Vlt Hi 4.01
239
Set 4-20 mA Lo 4.01
240
Set 4-20 mA Hi 4.01
Group
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
Metering
Metering
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
Advanced Setup
Motor Control
Ratings ➀
Ratings ➀
Diagnostics
Faults
I/O Config
Setup + Enc. Fdbk.
Setup + Enc. Fdbk.
Owners
Process Display
Process Display
Process Display
Setup
Setup
Advanced Setup ➁
Motor Control
Advanced Setup
Linear List
Motor Control
Feature Select
Linear List
Ratings ➀
Ratings ➀
Motor Control
Faults
Metering
Setup
Faults
Diagnostics
Masks
Faults
Linear List
Linear List
Linear List
Linear List
Diagnostics 2.03
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Faults
Setup
Feature Select
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Advanced Setup
Setup
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
Diagnostics
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
X.xx Firmware version X.xx or later. ➀ Located in the “Diagnostics” group for firmware versions before 2.01. ➁ “Motor Control” group for firmware versions 4.01 & later.
Specifications and Supplemental Information
A–11
Parameter Cross
Reference – By Name
Name
No.
Group
Name
No.
Group
Name
No.
Group
2nd Drive Sts 4.01
% Output Curr
% Output Power
0-10 Volt Hertz
4-20 mA Loss Sel
4-20 mA Hertz
Abs Analog Out 4.01
Accel Mask
Accel Owner
Accel Time 1
Accel Time 2
Adaptive I Lim 4.01
Alarm Mask 2.01
Analog Invert
Analog Out Sel
Analog Trim En
Anlg Out Offset
Base Frequency
Base Voltage
Blwn Fuse Flt
Boost Slope 4.01
Break Frequency
Break Voltage
Bus Limit En
Clear Fault
Control Select 4.01
CR1 Out Select 4.01
CR2-4 Out Select 4.01
Cur Lim Trip En
Current Angle
Current Limit
Current Lmt Sel 4.01
Data In A1
Data In A2
Data In B1
Data In B2
Data In C1
Data In C2
Data In D1
Data In D2
Data Out A1
Data Out A2
Data Out B1
Data Out B2
Data Out C1
Data Out C2
Data Out D1
Data Out D2
DC Boost Select
DC Bus Memory
DC Bus Voltage
DC Hold Level
DC Hold Time
Decel Mask
Decel Owner
Decel Time 1
Decel Time 2
Dig Out Current
Dig Out Freq
Dig Out Torque
Digital Out Sel
Direction Mask
Direction Owner
Drive Alarm
Drive Direction
Drive Rtd Volts
Drive Status
Drive Type
Dwell Frequency
Dwell Time
EEPROM Cksum 4.01
Encoder Type
Fault Alarms
Fault Buffer 0
Fault Buffer 1
Fault Buffer 2
236
2
3
139
150
140
233
98
107
7
30
227
206
84
25
90
154
17
18
81
169
49
50
11
51
9
158
174-176
82
72
36
232
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
9
212
53
13
12
99
108
8
31
160
159
161
158
94
103
60
69
147
59
61
43
44
172
152
173
86
87
88
Diagnostics
Metering
Metering
Metering
Advanced Setup
Metering
I/O Config
Masks
Owners
Setup
Advanced Setup
Setup
Masks
Advanced Setup
I/O Config
Advanced Setup
I/O Config
Setup ➁ + Adv. Setup
Setup ➁ + Adv. Setup
Faults
Motor Control
Advanced Setup ➁
Advanced Setup ➁
Advanced Setup
Faults
Motor Control
I/O Config
I/O Config
Faults
Diagnostics
Setup
Setup
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Advanced Setup ➁
Diagnostics 2.03
Metering
Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup
Masks
Owners
Setup
Advanced Setup
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
Masks
Owners
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Ratings ➀
Diagnostics
Ratings ➀
Feature Select
Feature Select
Diagnostics
Encoder Feedback
Faults
Faults
Faults
Faults
Fault Buffer 3
Fault Data
Fault Frequency
Fault Mask
Fault Owner
Firmware Ver.
Flt Clear Mode
Flt Driv Status
Flt Motor Mode
Flt Power Mode
Flux Amps Ref 4.01
Flux Current
Flux Up Time 4.01
Flying Start En
Freq Command
Freq Ref SqRoot 4.01
Freq Select 1
Freq Select 2
Freq Source
FStart Forward
FStart Reverse
Ground Warning 2.01
Heatsink Temp
Hold Level Sel 4.01
Input Mode
Input Status
IR Drop Volts 4.01
Jog Frequency
Jog Mask
Jog Owner
KI Amps 2.03
KP Amps 2.03
KI Process 3.01
KP Process 3.01
KI Volts
KP Volts
Language
Last Fault
Latched Alarms 2.01
Line Loss Fault
LLoss FStart
Local Mask
Local Owner
Logic Mask
Low Bus Fault
Max Traverse
Maximum Freq
Maximum Speed
Maximum Voltage
Minimum Freq
MOP Hertz
MOP Increment
MOP Mask
MOP Owner
Motor Mode
Motor NP Amps 4.01
Motor NP Hertz
Motor NP RPM
Motor NP Volts 4.01
Motor OL Count 4.01
Motor OL Fault 4.01
Motor Poles
Motor Type
Output Current
Output Freq
Output Power
Output Pulses
Output Voltage
Overload Amps
Overload Mode
P Jump
PI Config 3.01
PI Error 3.01
PI Fdbk Select 3.01
PI Feedback 3.01
89
207
145
100
109
71
39
146
143
144
192
163
200
155
65
229
5
6
62
156
157
204
70
231
21
55
194
24
96
105
192
193
221
222
194
196
47
4
205
40
228
93
179
92
91
79
19
151
20
16
137
22
101
110
141
191
178
177
190
202
201
153
41
54
66
23
67
1
38
37
80
213
219
216
218
Faults
Faults 4.01
Faults
Masks
Owners
Ratings ➀
Faults
Faults
Faults
Faults
Motor Control
Metering
Motor Control
Feature Select
Metering + Diagnostics
Frequency Set
Setup + Freq. Set
Frequency Set
Diagnostics
Feature Select
Feature Select
Faults
Metering + Diagnostics
Advanced Setup
Setup + I/O Config 4.01
Diagnostics
Motor Control
Frequency Set
Masks
Owners
Advanced Setup ➁
Advanced Setup
Process PI
Process PI
Linear List
Linear List
Feature Select
Metering
Diagnostics
Faults
Feature Select
Masks
Owners
Masks
Faults
Feature Select
Setup + Adv. Setup
Encoder Feedback
Setup ➁ + Adv. Setup
Setup + Adv. Setup
Metering
Frequency Set
Masks
Owners
Diagnostics
Setup
Enc. Fdbk. + Setup 4.01
Enc. Fdbk. + Setup 4.01
Setup
Metering
Faults
Encoder Feedback
Advanced Setup
Metering
Metering
Metering
Diagnostics
Metering
Setup
Setup
Feature Select
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
PI Neg Limit 3.01
PI Output 3.01
PI Pos Limit 3.01
PI Preload 4.01
PI Ref Select 3.01
PI Reference 3.01
PI Status 3.01
Pot Hertz
Power Mode
Power OL Count 4.01
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Process 1 Par
Process 1 Scale
Process 1 Txt 1-8
Process 2 Par
Process 2 Scale
Process 2 Txt 1-8
Pulse/Enc Hertz
Pulse/Enc Scale
PWM Frequency
Rated Amps
Rated CT Amps
Rated CT kW
Rated kW
Rated VT Amps
Rated VT kW
Reference Mask
Reference Owner
Reset/Run Time
Reset/Run Tries
Run/Accel Boost 2.01
Run Boost
Run On Power Up
S Curve Enable
S Curve Time
Save MOP Ref 4.01
Set 0-10 Vlt Hi 4.01
Set 0-10 Vlt Lo 4.01
Set 4-20 mA Hi 4.01
Set 4-20 mA Lo 4.01
Set Anlg Out Hi 4.01
Set Anlg Out Lo 4.01
Set Defaults
Shear Pin Fault 4.01
Skip Freq 1
Skip Freq 2
Skip Freq 3
Skip Freq Band
Slip @ F.L.A.
Slip Comp Gain 4.01
Speed Adder
Speed Control
Speed Error
Speed Integral
Speed KI
Start Boost
Start Mask
Start Owner
Stop Mode Used
Stop Owner
Stop Select 1
Stop Select 2
Time Data 1
Time Data 3
Time Data 5
Time Data 7
Torque Current
Traverse Period
VT Scaling
223
220
224
225
215
217
214
138
142
84
27
28
29
73
74
75
76
127
128
129-136
180
181
182-189
63
46
45
170
148
149
171
198
199
97
106
15
85
169
83
14
57
56
230
238
237
240
239
235
234
64
226
32
33
34
35
42
195
168
77
166
167
165
48
95
104
26
102
10
52
208
209
210
211
162
78
203
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Metering
Diagnostics
Metering
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Process Display
Process Display
Process Display
Process Display
Process Display
Process Display
Meter. + Enc. Fdbk. 2.01
Freq. Set + Enc. Fdbk.
Advanced Setup
Ratings ➀
Ratings ➀
Ratings ➀
Ratings ➀
Ratings ➀
Ratings ➀
Masks
Owners
Feature Select
Feature Select
Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup ➁
Feature Select
Feature Select
Feature Select
Frequency Set
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
Diagnostics
Faults
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Feature Select
Feature Select
Encoder Feedback
Enc. Fdbk. + Process PI
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
Advanced Setup ➁
Masks
Owners
Diagnostics
Owners
Setup + Adv. Setup
Advanced Setup
Linear List
Linear List
Linear List
Linear List
Metering
Feature Select
Setup
X.xx Firmware version X.xx or later. ➀ Located in the “Diagnostics” group for firmware versions before 2.01. ➁ “Motor Control” group for firmware versions 4.01 & later.
A–12
Specifications and Supplemental Information
HIM Character Map
Character
Decimal
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
Hex
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
Character
Decimal
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
Hex
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
C0
Character
Decimal
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
255
Hex
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FF
Specifications and Supplemental Information
A–13
Communications Data
Information Format
Drive Status Structure
This provides the drive status information that will be sent to the
logic controllers input image table
when the Communication Module
is set to control the drive.
Logic Control Structure
This information provides the control logic information that is sent to
the drive through the logic controllers output image table when the
Communication Module is set to
control the drive.
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9
Reference
ID
Reference
Freq Select 1
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Freq Select 2
Adapter 1
Adapter 2
Adapter 3
Adapter 4
Adapter 5
Adapter 6
Jog Frequency
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
14
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
13
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
12
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
11
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
10
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
9
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9
Reference Select Decel Time
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Alarm
Faulted
At Speed
Bit 8
Accel Time
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
14
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
13
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
12
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Start
Clear Faults
Time
No Command
Time 1
Time 2
Hold Time
9/11
0
0
1
1
8/10
0
1
0
1
Direction
No Command
Forward
Reverse
Hold Direction
Local Lockout
MOP Increment
MOP Decrement
Bit 0
Stop
Direction
Jog
Reference
No Command
Freq Select 1
Freq Select 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Bit 0
Enabled
Running
Command Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
Actual Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
Accelerating
Decelerating
Local
Adapter ID
Local
TB3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Unused
Bit 4
5
0
0
1
1
4
0
1
0
1
A–14
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Typical Programmable
Controller
Communications
Configurations
Using Datalink A1
Programmable
Controller
I/O Image Table
Remote I/O
Communication
Module
1336 PLUS
Adjustable Frequency
AC Drive
Output Image
Block Transfer
Logic Command
Analog Reference
WORD 3
WORD 4
WORD 5
WORD 6
WORD 7
Datalink A
Parameter/Number
Data In A1
Data In A2
111
112
Datalink A
Data Out A1 119
Data Out A2 120
Input Image
Block Transfer
Logic Status
Analog Feedback
WORD 3
WORD 4
WORD 5
WORD 6
WORD 7
Without Block Transfer1
Programmable
Controller
I/O Image Table
Remote I/O
Communication
Module
Output Image
Logic Command
Analog Reference
WORD 2
WORD 3
1336 PLUS
Adjustable Frequency
AC Drive
Direct
to
Drive
Logic
Datalink A
WORD 4
WORD 5
WORD 6
WORD 7
Datalink C
Input Image
Logic Status
Analog Feedback
WORD 2
WORD 3
Direct
from
Drive
Logic
Datalink A
WORD 4
WORD 5
Parameter/Number
Data In A1 111
Data In A2 112
Data In B1
Data In B2
113
114
Data In C1
Data In C2
115
116
Data In D1
Data In D2
117
118
Parameter/Number
Data Out A1 119
Data Out A2 120
Data Out B1 121
Data Out B2 122
WORD 6
WORD 7
Datalink C
Data Out C1 123
Data Out C2 124
Data Out D1 125
Data Out D2 126
1
Refer to the 1203 User Manual for further information.
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Typical Serial
Communications
Configurations
Master Device
Register Objects
Serial to SCANport
Communications Module
A–15
1336 PLUS
Adjustable Frequency
AC Drive
Output
Output
WORD 1
WORD 2
WORD 1
WORD 2
WORD 3
WORD 4
WORD a
WORD a+1
WORD 5
WORD 6
WORD b
WORD b+1
WORD 7
WORD 8
WORD c
WORD c+1
WORD 9
WORD 10
WORD d
WORD d+1
Input
Input
WORD 1
WORD 2
WORD 1
WORD 2
WORD 3
WORD 4
WORD a
WORD a+1
Datalink A
WORD 5
WORD 6
WORD b
WORD b+1
Datalink B
WORD 7
WORD 8
WORD c
WORD c+1
Datalink C
WORD 9
WORD 10
WORD d
WORD d+1
Datalink D
Direct
to
Drive
Logic
Datalink A
Datalink B
Datalink C
Datalink D
Direct
from
Drive
Logic
Parameter/Number
Data In A1 111
Data In A2 112
Data In B1
Data In B2
113
114
Data In C1
Data In C2
115
116
Data In D1
Data In D2
117
118
Parameter/Number
Data Out A1 119
Data Out A2 120
Data Out B1 121
Data Out B2 122
Data Out C1 123
Data Out C2 124
Data Out D1 125
Data Out D2 126
A–16
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Read/Write Parameter
Record
No. Name
Setting
When using a Series B HIM, the parameters listed can be uploaded
to the HIM for downloading to other drives.
No. Name
Setting
No. Name
Setting
No. Name
5
Freq Select 1
47
Language
120 Data Out A2
184 Process 2 Txt 3
6
Freq Select 2
48
Start Boost
121 Data Out B1
185 Process 2 Txt 4
7
Accel Time 1
49
Break Frequency
122 Data Out B2
186 Process 2 Txt 5
8
Decel Time 1
50
Break Voltage
123 Data Out C1
187 Process 2 Txt 6
9
DC Boost Select
52
Stop Select 2
124 Data Out C2
188 Process 2 Txt 7
9
Control Select
56
S Curve Time
125 Data Out D1
189 Process 2 Txt 8
10
Stop Select 1
57
S Curve Enable
126 Data Out D2
190 Motor NP Volts
11
Bus Limit En
73
Preset Freq 4
127 Process 1 Par
191 Motor NP Amps
12
DC Hold Time
74
Preset Freq 5
128 Process 1 Scale
192 KI Amps
13
DC Hold Level
75
Preset Freq 6
129 Process 1 Txt 1
192 Flux Amps Ref
14
Run On Power Up
76
Preset Freq 7
130 Process 1 Txt 2
193 KP Amps
15
Reset/Run Time
77
Speed Control
131 Process 1 Txt 3
194 IR Drop Volts
16
Minimum Freq
78
Traverse Period
132 Process 1 Txt 4
17
Base Frequency
79
Max Traverse
133 Process 1 Txt 5
18
Base Voltage
80
P Jump
134 Process 1 Txt 6
19
Maximum Freq
81
Blwn Fuse Flt
135 Process 1 Txt 7
20
Maximum Voltage
82
Cur Lim Trip En
136 Process 1 Txt 8
21
Input Mode
83
Run Boost
150 4-20 mA Loss Sel
22
MOP Increment
84
Analog Invert
151 Maximum Speed
24
Jog Frequency
85
Reset/Run Tries
152 Encoder Type
25
Analog Out Sel
90
Analog Trim En
154 Anlg Out Offset
27
Preset Freq 1
91
Low Bus Fault
155 Flying Start En
28
Preset Freq 2
92
Logic Mask
156 FStart Forward
29
Preset Freq 3
93
Local Mask
157 FStart Reverse
30
Accel Time 2
94
Direction Mask
158 Digital Out Sel
31
Decel Time 2
95
Start Mask
158 CR1 Out Select
32
Skip Freq 1
96
Jog Mask
159 Dig Out Freq
33
Skip Freq 2
97
Reference Mask
160 Dig Out Current
34
Skip Freq 3
98
Accel Mask
161 Dig Out Torque
35
Skip Freq Band
99
Decel Mask
165 Speed KI
228 LLoss FStart
36
Current Limit
100 Fault Mask
169 Run/Accel Boost
229 Freq Ref SqRoot
37
Overload Mode
101 MOP Mask
169 Boost Slope
230 Save MOP Ref
38
Overload Amps
111 Data In A1
174 CR2 Out Select
231 Hold Level Sel
39
Flt Clear Mode
112 Data In A2
175 CR3 Out Select
232 Current Lmt Sel
40
Line Loss Fault
113 Data In B1
176 CR4 Out Select
233 Abs Analog Out
41
Motor Type
114 Data In B2
177 Motor NP RPM
234 Set Anlg Out Lo
42
Slip @ F.L.A.
115 Data In C1
178 Motor NP Hertz
235 Set Anlg Out Hi
43
Dwell Frequency
116 Data In C2
180 Process 2 Par
237 Set 0-10 Vlt Lo
44
Dwell Time
117 Data In D1
181 Process 2 Scale
238 Set 0-10 Vlt Hi
45
PWM Frequency
118 Data In D2
182 Process 2 Txt 1
239 Set 4-20 mA Lo
46
Pulse/Enc Scale
119 Data Out A1
183 Process 2 Txt 2
240 Set 4-20 mA Hi
195 Slip Comp Gain
200 Flux Up Time
201 Motor OL Fault
203 VT Scaling
204 Ground Warning
206 Alarm Mask
213 PI Config
215 PI Ref Select
216 PI Fdbk Select
221 KI Process
222 KP Process
223 PI Neg Limit
224 PI Pos Limit
225 PI Preload
226 Shear Pin Fault
227 Adaptive I Lim
Setting
Appendix
B
Appendix B provides detailed dimension information for the 1336
PLUS. Included are:
• IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Dimensions.
• IP65/54 (NEMA Type 4/12) Dimensions.
• Heat Sink-through-the-Back Cutout Dimensions.
• TB1 Terminal Block Dimensions for D, E & G Frame Drives.
• Typical Mounting of a G Frame Open Chassis Drive in a User
Supplied Enclosure.
Important:
The dimensions given on the following drawings are for
estimating purposes only. Contact your Allen-Bradley
Sales Office if certified drawings are required.
B–2
Dimensions
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Dimensions – Frames A1 through A4
A
Y
Z
C Max.
D
AA E B
Mounting Hole Detail
7.0 (0.28)
7.0 (0.28)
12.7 (0.50)
BB
12.7 (0.50)
CC
Frame
Three-Phase Rating 1, 2
Reference
500-600V
380-480V
200-240V
–
A1
0.37-1.2 kW
0.37-0.75 kW
0.5-1.5 HP
0.5-1 HP
–
A2
1.5-2.2 kW
1.2-1.5 kW
2-3 HP
1.5-2 HP
A3
–
3.7 kW
2.2-3.7 kW
5 HP
3-5 HP
A4
5.5-7.5 kW * 0.75-3.7 kW
–
1-5 HP
7.5-10 HP
B1/B2
5.5-15 kW
5.5-22 kW *
5.5-11 kW
7.5-20 HP
7.5-30 HP
7.5-15 HP
C
18.5-45 kW
30-45 kW
15-22 kW
25-60 HP
40-60 HP
20-30 HP
56-93 kW
D
45-112 kW
30-45 kW
75-125 HP
60-150 HP
40-60 HP
112-187 kW
E
112-187 kW
56-93 kW
150-250 HP
150-250 HP
75-125 HP
187-336 kW
F
187-336 kW
–
250-450 HP
250-450 HP
224-448 kW
G
187-448 kW
–
300-600 HP
250-600 HP
* Use care when choosing Frame Reference - Some ratings may
exist in another frame size.
Mounting Holes (4) – See Detail
Bottom View Will Vary with HP – See Bottom View Dimensions
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
Frame
Reference
A1
A2
A3
A4
A
215.9
(8.50)
215.9
(8.50)
215.9
(8.50)
260.0
(10.24)
B
290.0
(11.42)
290.0
(11.42)
290.0
(11.42)
350.0
(13.78)
C Max.
160.0
(6.30)
180.5
(7.10)
207.0
(8.15)
212.0
(8.35)
D
185.2
(7.29)
185.2
(7.29)
185.2
(7.29)
230.0
(9.06)
1 Refer to Chapter 1 for catalog numbers and Appendix for derating info.
E
275.0
(10.83)
275.0
(10.83)
275.0
(10.83)
320.0
(12.60)
Y
15.35
(0.60)
15.35
(0.60)
15.35
(0.60)
15.35
(0.60)
Z
7.5
(0.30)
7.5
(0.30)
7.5
(0.30)
15.35
(0.60)
AA
130.0
(5.12)
130.0
(5.12)
130.0
(5.12)
130.0
(5.12)
2 kW/HP are constant torque (CT) ratings.
BB
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
133.0
(5.23)
CC
85.3
(3.36)
85.3
(3.36)
85.3
(3.36)
86.0
(3.39)
Shipping
Weights
4.31 kg
(9.5 lbs.)
5.49 kg
(12.1 lbs.)
6.71 kg
(14.8 lbs.)
15.90 kg
(35.0 lbs.)
Dimensions
B–3
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Dimensions – Frames B, C, D
A
Y
Z
C Max.
D
Mounting Hole Detail
(Frames B & C)
7.1 (0.28)
7.1 (0.28)
12.7 (0.50)
12.7 (0.50)
AA E B
Mounting Hole Detail
(Frame D)
BB
R 5.2 (0.20)
14.7 (0.58)
R 9.5 (0.38)
CC
Mounting Holes (4) – See Detail
Bottom View Will Vary with HP – See Bottom View Dimensions
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
Frame
Reference
B1/B2
C
D
A
276.4
(10.88)
301.8
(11.88)
381.5
(15.02)
B
476.3
(18.75)
701.0
(27.60)
1240.0
(48.82)
C Max.
225.0
(8.86)
225.0
(8.86)
270.8
(10.66)
D
212.6
(8.37)
238.0
(9.37)
325.9
(12.83)
E
461.0
(18.15)
685.8
(27.00)
1216.2
(47.88)
Y
32.00
(1.26)
32.00
(1.26)
27.94
(1.10)
Z
7.6
(0.30)
7.6
(0.30)
11.94
(0.47)
AA
131.1
(5.16)
131.1
(5.16)
131.1
(5.16)
BB
180.8
(7.12)
374.7
(14.75)
688.6
(27.11)
CC
71.9
(2.83)
71.9
(2.83)
83.6
(3.29)
Shipping
Weight
22.7 kg
(50 lbs.)
38.6 kg
(85 lbs.)
108.9 kg
(240 lbs.)
B–4
Dimensions
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions – Frame E
A
Y
Z
C Max.
D
37.9
(1.49)
Mounting Hole Detail
AA
Dia. 10.2 (0.40)
17.0 (0.67)
E B
Dia. 19.1 (0.75)
BB
See Bottom View Dimensions for Details
CC
Mounting Holes (4) – See Detail
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
Frame
Reference
E – Enclosed
E – Open
A
511.0
(20.12)
511.0
(20.12)
B
1498.6
(59.00)
1498.6
(59.00)
C Max.
424.4
(16.71)
372.6
(14.67)
D
477.5
(18.80)
477.5
(18.80)
E
1447.8
(57.00)
1447.8
(57.00)
Y
16.8
(0.66)
16.8
(0.66)
Z
40.1
(1.61)
40.1
(1.61)
AA
195.0
(7.68)
138.4
(5.45)
BB
901.4
(35.49)
680.0
(26.77)
CC
151.9
(5.98)
126.3
(4.97)
Shipping
Weight
186 kg
(410 lbs.)
163 kg
(360 lbs.)
Dimensions
B–5
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions – Frame F
635.0
(25.00)
Open Chassis
487.7 (19.20)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
762.0
(30.00)
252.7
(9.95)
2286.0
(90.00)
37.9
(1.49)
193.0
(7.60)
1219.2
(48.00)
274.8
(10.82)
31.5
(1.24)
698.5
(27.50)
Approximate Shipping Weight (drive & pallet):
415.0 kg (915 lbs.)
Conduit
Access Area
298.5
(11.75)
Bottom View
50.8
(2.00)
B–6
Dimensions
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions – Frame G
63.5 (2.50)
Removable Lifting Angle
Open Chassis Dimensions
Depth = 508.3 (20.01)
Weight = 453.6 kg (1000 lbs.)
117.3
(4.62)
2324.1
(91.50)
1524.0
(60.00)
19.3
(0.76)
648.0
(25.51)
Important: Two (2) 725 CFM fans are
required if an open type drive is
mounted in a user supplied
enclosure.
762.0
(30.00)
635.0
(25.00)
Conduit
Access Area
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
See Bottom View Dimensions for Details
Dimensions
B–7
IP 65/54 (NEMA Type 4/12) Dimensions
A
See Detail A
D
12.4 (0.49)
C
F
G
H
See
Detail B
E
B
7.9 (0.31)
12.7 (0.50)
7.1 (0.28) Dia.
12.7 (0.50)
14.3 (0.56) Dia.
Typical Top and Bottom
Detail A
12.7 (0.50) Dia.
Drive
Heatsink
19.1 (0.75)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
Frame
Reference
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C
5.5 kW (7.5 HP) at 200-240V AC
5.5-11 kW (7.5-15 HP) at 380-480V AC
5.5-7.5 kW (7.5-10 HP) at 500-600V AC
7.5-11 kW (10-15 HP) at 200-240V AC
15-22 kW (20-30 HP) at 380-480V AC
11-15 kW (15-20 HP) at 500-600V AC
A
430.0
(16.93)
430.0
(16.93)
430.0
(16.93)
655.0
(25.79)
655.0
(25.79)
655.0
(25.79)
655.0
(25.79)
19.1 (0.75) Dia.
Detail B
B
525.0
(20.67)
525.0
(20.67)
525.0
(20.67)
650.0
(25.59)
650.0
(25.59)
900.0
(35.43)
1200.0
(47.24)
C
350.0
(13.78)
350.0
(13.78)
350.0
(13.78)
425.0
(16.74)
425.0
(16.74)
425.0
(16.74)
425.0
(16.74)
D
404.9
(15.94)
404.9
(15.94)
404.9
(15.94)
629.9
(24.80)
629.9
(24.80)
629.9
(24.80)
629.9
(24.80)
E
500.1
(19.69)
500.1
(19.69)
500.1
(19.69)
625.1
(24.61)
625.1
(24.61)
875.0
(34.45)
1174.5
(46.22)
F
250.0
(9.84)
250.0
(9.84)
250.0
(9.84)
293.0
(11.54)
293.0
(11.54)
293.0
(11.54)
293.0
(11.54)
G
N/A
H
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
63.5
(2.50)
63.5
(2.50)
63.5
(2.50)
63.5
(2.50)
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
Approx. Ship
Weight
16.8 kg
(37.0 lbs.)
17.9 kg
(39.4 lbs.)
18.6 kg
(41.0 lbs.)
39.5 kg
(87.0 lbs.)
44.7 kg
(98.5 lbs.)
56.5 kg
(124.5 lbs.)
80.7 kg
(178.0 lbs.)
B–8
Dimensions
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Bottom View Dimensions – Frames A through C
Frames A1 through A4
S
R
Q
22.2 (0.88) Conduit Knockout - 1 Plc.
P
22.2/28.6 (0.88/1.13)
Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs.
N M L
Fans will be present on A4 Frame
Frame
Reference
A1
A2
A3
A4
L
111.8
(4.40)
132.3
(5.21)
158.8
(6.25)
164.0
(6.45)
M
105.4
(4.15)
126.0
(4.96)
152.4
(6.00)
164.0
(6.45)
N
86.3
(3.40)
106.9
(4.21)
133.4
(5.25)
139.0
(5.47)
P
31.0
(1.22)
31.0
(1.22)
31.0
(1.22)
27.0
(1.06)
Q
69.1
(2.72)
69.1
(2.72)
69.1
(2.72)
65.0
(2.56)
R
102.1
(4.02)
102.1
(4.02)
102.1
(4.02)
97.0
(3.82)
S
135.4
(5.33)
135.4
(5.33)
135.4
(5.33)
128.7
(5.07)
Frames B and C
S
R
Q
28.6/34.9 (1.13/1.38)
Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs.
P
22.2 (0.88) Conduit Knockout - 1 Plc.
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
M L
Frame
Reference
B1/B2
C
L
181.6
(7.15)
181.6
(7.15)
M
167.1
(6.58)
167.1
(6.58)
P
112.8
(4.44)
119.1
(4.69)
Q
163.6
(6.44)
182.6
(7.19)
R
214.4
(8.44)
233.4
(9.19)
S
249.9
(9.84)
275.3
(10.84)
Dimensions
B–9
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Bottom View Dimensions – Frames D–G
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
Frame D
62.7/76.2 (2.47/3.00)
Conduit Knockout - 2 Plcs.
343.9 (13.54)
261.4 (10.29)
34.9 (1.38)
Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs.
144.0 (5.67)
52.1 (2.05)
34.9/50.0 (1.38/1.97)
Conduit Knockout - 1 Plc.
198.1
(7.80)
169.4
(6.67)
131.6
(5.18)
204.5
(8.05)
153.7
(6.05)
Frame E
432.3 (17.02)
305.3 (12.02)
178.3 (7.02)
38.6 (1.52)
88.9/101.6 (3.50/4.00)
Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs.
50.8 (2.0)
12.7 (0.50) Conduit Knockout - 6 Plcs.
311.2
(12.25)
260.4
(10.25)
209.6
(8.25)
Frame G
431.8
(17.00)
Conduit Access Area
(Top)
431.8
(17.00)
50.8 (2.00)
660.4 (26.00)
Conduit
Access Area
547.6
(21.56)
29.0 (1.14)
254.0
(10.00)
298.5
(11.75)
42.9
(1.69)
381.0
(15.00)
15.9 (0.63) Dia. - 2 Mtg. Holes
(Bottom)
B–10
Dimensions
Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting – Frames A1 through A3
210.0 1
(8.25)
98.0
(3.86)
196.0
(7.72)
182.1
(7.17)
78.1
(3.076)
234.2
(9.2204)
249.7 1
(9.83)
78.2
(3.080)
220.0
(8.66)
Cutout
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
10 Required
4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10/32 Taptite® (or equiv.) – 4.0 (0.159) for 10/32 threaded
Back of Enclosure
Drive
A1 = 50.8 (2.00)
A2 = 71.4 (2.81)
A3 = 98.8 (3.85)
1 Shading
indicates approximate size
of drive inside enclosure.
Dimensions
B–11
Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting – Frame A4
257.0 1
(10.12)
80.4
(3.17)
160.9
(6.33)
120.7
(4.75)
241.3
(9.50)
225.0
(8.86)
301.2
(11.86)
225.9
(8.89)
317.0 1
(12.48)
285.0
(11.22)
Cutout
150.6
(5.93)
75.3
(2.96)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
14 Required
4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10/32 Taptite® (or equiv.) – 4.0 (0.159) for 10/32 threaded
Back of Enclosure
Drive
90.0 (3.54)
1 Shading
indicates approximate size
of drive inside enclosure.
B–12
Dimensions
Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting – Frame B1/B2
267.2 1
(10.52)
257.1
(10.12)
6.35
(0.25)
244.4
(9.62)
2.54
(0.10)
435.4 1
(17.14)
415.3
(16.35)
410.2
(16.15)
308.6
(12.15)
Cutout as Viewed
from INSIDE Enclosure
283.2
(11.15)
127.0
(5.00)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
8 Required
4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10/32 Taptite® (or equiv.) – 4.0 (0.159) for 10/32 threaded
Drive
Back of Enclosure
129.3 (5.09)
1 Shading
indicates approximate size
of drive inside enclosure.
Dimensions
B–13
Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting – Frame C
303.8 1
(11.96)
282.5
(11.12)
4.8
(0.19)
273.1
(10.75)
4.8
(0.19)
635.0
(25.00)
Cutout
644.7
(25.38)
508.0
(20.00)
660.4 1
(26.00)
381.0
(15.00)
254.0
(10.00)
12 Required
4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10/32 Taptite® (or equiv.)
4.0 (0.159) for 10/32 threaded
127.0
(5.00)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
Drive
1 Shading
indicates approximate size
of drive inside enclosure.
Back of Enclosure
129.3 (5.09)
B–14
Dimensions
Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting – Frame D
9.9 (0.39)
Detail
356.1
(14.02)
4.6 (0.18)
362.2
(14.26)
375.2 1
(14.77)
6.1
(0.24)
See Detail
26.7
(1.05)
1118.6
(44.04)
1054.4
(41.51)
1145.3
(45.09)
962.7
(37.90)
867.4
(34.15)
806.7
(31.76)
773.9
(30.47)
680.5
(26.79)
1178.1 1
(46.38)
Cutout as Viewed
from INSIDE Enclosure
650.8
(25.62)
587.0
(23.11)
494.5
(19.47)
338.6
(13.33)
182.6
(7.19)
All Dimensions in Millimeters
and (Inches)
16 Required
4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10/32 Taptite® (or equiv.)
4.0 (0.159) for 10/32 threaded
26.7
(1.05)
1 Shading
indicates approximate size
of drive inside enclosure.
* Minimum dimension allowed – More space will
improve fan effectiveness and heat dissipation.
Drive
Back of Enclosure
84.1 (3.31) *
Dimensions
B–15
Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting – Frame E
508.0 1
(20.00)
5.8
(0.23)
489.0
(19.25)
127.0
(5.00)
54.1
(2.13)
477.3
(18.79)
Cutout
1084.1
(42.68)
1422.4 1
(56.00)
1095.8
(43.14)
127.0
(5.00)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
26 Required
4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10/32 Taptite® (or equiv.)
4.0 (0.159) for 10/32 threaded
75.4
(2.97) 5.8
(0.23)
Back of Enclosure
1 Shading
indicates approximate size
of drive inside enclosure.
* Minimum dimension allowed – More space will
improve fan effectiveness and heat dissipation.
Drive
132.33 (5.21) *
B–16
Dimensions
TB1 Dimensions for D & E Frame Drives
27.0
(1.10)
35.0
(1.38)
31.0
(1.22)
61.5
(2.42)
93.0
(3.66)
42.0
(1.65)
M10 Stud (Approximate 0.375 in.) - 2 Places
Recommended Torque - 10 N-m (87 lb.-in.)
Recommended Wrench - 17 mm
75 x 31 (2.95 x 1.22)
Removable Bar
18.0
(0.71)
28.0
(1.10)
23.0
(0.91)
63.5
(2.50)
Also applies to TB1 on D Frame Drives
69.0
(2.72)
35.0
(1.38)
M8 Stud (Approximate 0.313 in.) - 2 Places
Recommended Torque - 6 N-m (52 lb.-in.)
Recommended Wrench - 13 mm
50.8 x 24 (2.00 x 0.95)
Removable Bar
Dimensions
B–17
TB1 Dimensions for G Frame Drives
6.3 (0.25)
117.3 (4.62)
206.2 (8.12)
41.7 (1.64)
9.7 (0.38)
16.0 (0.63)
70.0
(2.75)
50.8
(2.00)
31.8
(1.25)
25.4
(1.00)
10.2 (0.40) Dia.
Typical - 15 Plcs.
19.1
(0.75)
31.8
(1.25)
16.0
(0.63)
B–18
Dimensions
Typical Frame G Mounting in User Supplied Enclosure
14.2 (0.56)
11.1 x 19.1
(0.44 x 0.75)
41.1
(1.62)
82.6 (3.25)
134.1
(5.28)
55.1
(2.17)
Bracket
Important: This information represents the method used to factory mount an
open type Frame G in an enclosure specifically designed by
Allen-Bradley. Illustrations are only intended to identify structural
mounting points and hardware shapes. You must design and
fabricate steel components based on the actual mounting
configuration, calculated loads and enclosure specifications.
Minimum thickness of all parts = 4.6 (0.18).
154.2
(6.07)
188.0
(7.40)
2 Plcs.
Each End
Length =
549.4 (21.63)
57.2
(2.25)
Rail
Brace
25.4 (1.00)
50.8 (2.00)
14.5 (0.57)
682.2 (26.86)
711.2 (28.00)
0.75 (19.1)
Appendix
C
Low Voltage Directive
The following low voltage directives apply:
• EN 60204-1
• PREN 50178
EMC Directive
This apparatus is tested to meet Council Directive 89/336
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) using a technical construction
file and the following standards:
• EN 50081–1, –2 – Generic Emission Standard
• EN 50082–1, –2 – Generic Immunity Standard
Declarations of Conformity to the European Union Directives are
available. Please contact your Allen-Bradley Sales Representative.
Marked for all applicable directives 1
Emissions
EN 50081-1
EN 50081-2
EN 55011 Class A
EN 55011 Class B
Immunity
EN 50082-1
EN 50082-2
IEC 801-1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 per EN50082-1, 2
1 Note: Installation guidelines stated below must be adhered to.
Important: The conformity of the drive and filter to any standard does
not guarantee that the entire installation will conform.
Many other factors can influence the total installation and
only direct measurements can verify total conformity.
Requirements for
Conforming Installation
The following six items are required for CE conformance:
1. Standard 1336 PLUS Drive 0.37-448 kW (0.5-600 HP) CE compatible (Series D or higher).
2. Factory installed EMC enclosure (-AE option) or field installed EMC
Enclosure Kit (1336x-AEx – see page C–2).
3. Filter as called out on the following page.
4. Grounding as shown on page C–3.
5. Input power (source to filter) and output power (filter to drive &
drive to motor) wiring must be braided, shielded cable with a coverage of 75% or better, metal conduit or other with equivalent or
better attenuation, mounted with appropriate connectors. For
shielded cable it is recommended to use a compact strain relief connector with double saddle clamp for filter and drive input and compact strain relief connector with EMI protection for motor output.
6. Control (I/O) and signal wiring must be in conduit or have
shielding with equivalent attenuation.
C–2
Filter
CE Conformity
Filter Selection
Filter Catalog
Number
1336-RFB-7-A
1336-RFB-16-A
1336-RFB-30-A
1336-RFB-27-B
1336-RFB-48-B
1336-RFB-80-C
1336-RFB-150-D
1336-RFB-180-D
1336-RFB-340-E
1336-RFB-475-G
1336-RFB-590-G
1336-RFB-670-G
Three-Phase
Volts
200-240V
380-480V
200-240V
380-480V
200-240V
380-480V
200-240V
380-480V
200-240V
380-480V
200-240V
380-480V
200-240V
380-480V
200-240V
380-480V
200-240V
380-480V
380-480V
380-480V
380-480V
Used with . . .
1336S-AQF05 - AQF10
1336S-BRF05 - BRF20
1336S-AQF15 - AQF20
1336S-BRF30 - BRF50
1336S-AQF30 - AQF50
1336S-BRF75, BRF100
1336S-A007
1336S-B007 - B015
1336S-A010 - A015
1336S-B020 - B030
1336S-A020 - A030
1336S-BX040 - BX060
1336S-A040 - A050
1336S-B060 - B100
1336S-A060
1336S-B125 - BX150
1336S-A075 - A125
1336S-B150 - B250
1336S-BX250 - B350
1336S-B400 - B450
1336S-B500 - B600
Frame
Reference
A1
A1-A2
A2
A2-A3
A3
A4
B
B
B
B
C
C
D
D
D
D
E
E
G
G
G
EMC Enclosure Kit Selection
r e
Frame
Reference
A1, A2, A3
A4
B
C
D
E
Enclosure Kit Catalog Number
380-480V Rating
500-600V Rating
200-240V Rating
1336S-AE3
1336S-AE3
–
1336S-AE2
1336S-AE2
1336S-AE2
1336S-AE4
1336S-AE4
1336S-AE4
1336S-AE5
1336S-AE5
1336S-AE5
1336S-AE6
1336S-AE6
1336S-AE6
1336S-AE7
1336S-AE7
1336S-AE7
RFI Filter Installation
Important:
Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter for details.
The RFI filter must be connected between the incoming AC supply
line and the drive input terminals.
CE Conformity
C–3
RFI Filter Leakage Current
The RFI filter may cause ground leakage currents. Therefore a solid
ground connection must be provided as shown below.
!
ATTENTION: To guard against possible equipment
damage, RFI filters can only be used with AC supplies
that are nominally balanced and grounded with respect
to ground. In some installations, three-phase supplies
are occasionally connected in a 3-wire configuration
with one phase grounded (Grounded Delta). The filter
must not be used in Grounded Delta supplies.
Electrical Configuration
Conduit/4-Wire Cable
R (L1)
RFI
Filter
S (L2)
ESC
SEL
JOG
T (L3)
PE
Shield Terminated in Cable
Clamp on A Frame Drives
Nearest
Building Structure Steel
Grounding
RFI Filter Grounding
Important:
Using the optional RFI filter may result in relatively
high ground leakage currents. Surge suppression
devices are also incorporated into the filter. Therefore,
the filter must be permanently installed and solidly
grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution
ground. Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is
solidly connected (bonded) to the same building power
distribution ground.
Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should
not include any form of plug or socket that would
permit inadvertent disconnection. Some local codes
may require redundant ground connections. The
integrity of all connections should be periodically
checked.
C–4
CE Conformity
Mechanical Configuration
Important: A positive electrical bond must
be maintained between drive and filter at
all 4 corners. Star washers can be
eliminated if a positive electrical
bond is assured.
Three-Phase Input 1
Important: Drive and filter must be
mounted to a common back plane
with a positive electrical bond and
in close proximity to one another.
Star Washers
Flat Washer
Three-Phase
Input 1
Bolt
Access
Panel
Bolt
To Motor 1
Cable Supplied with Filter 1
1336 PLUS
Frames A1 - A4 2
1
Conduit 1
To Motor 1
1336 PLUS & FORCE
Frames B & C 2
Input power (source to filter) and output power (filter to drive and drive to motor) wiring must be in conduit or have shielding/armor with equivalent attenuation.
Shielding/armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate. See requirements 6 & 7 on page C–1.
2 Refer to the Filter Selection table on page C–2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers.
CE Conformity
C–5
Filter Mounting (continued)
Important: Drive and filter must be
mounted to a common back plane with
a positive electrical bond. Spacing is
determined by Conduit Box.
Three-Phase
Input 1
Filter Mounting
Bracket
Three-Phase
Input 1
Access Panel and
Input Terminal Block
Lower Access Panel
To Motor 1
To Motor 1
Conduit Box 1
Conduit Box 1
Filter Mounting
Bracket
1
Nipple/Fitting
1336 PLUS & FORCE
(Through-the-Wall Mounting)
1336 PLUS & FORCE
(Conventional Mounting)
Frames D & E 2
Frames D & E 2
Input power (source to filter) and output power (filter to drive and drive to motor) wiring must be in conduit or have shielding/armor with equivalent attenuation.
Shielding/armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate. See requirements 6 & 7 on page C–1.
2 Refer to the Filter Selection table on page C–2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers.
C–6
CE Conformity
Filter Mounting (continued)
Important: A positive electrical bond must be maintained
between the enclosure and filter (including brackets),
fans, and drive. To assure a positive electrical bond,
any paint near all mounting points must be
removed.
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
Important: Cooling fans are required for proper
drive operation. Refer to the PLUS/FORCE User
Manual for CFM recommendations.
Typical Connection
to Drive
75.0
(2.95)
Mounting Brackets
AC Input Terminals
831.0
(32.72)
Important: This information represents the
method used to mount 1336-RFB-475, 590 & 670
filters in an Allen-Bradley supplied EMC enclosure. User
supplied EMC enclosures must follow all of the guidelines
shown. Illustrations are only intended to identify structural
mounting points and hardware shapes. You must design and
fabricate steel components based on the actual mounting
configuration, calculated loads and enclosure specifications. Refer to
the PLUS/FORCE User Manual for drive mounting requirements.
Typical Bracket
for Stability
1336 PLUS & FORCE
(Typical Mounting)
Frame G 2
1
Input power (source to filter) and output power (filter to drive and drive to motor) wiring must be in conduit or have shielding/armor with equivalent attenuation.
Shielding/armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate. See requirements 6 & 7 on page C–1.
2 Refer to the Filter Selection table on page C–2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers.
CE Conformity
C–7
Required Knockout Assignments
Dimensions are in Millimeters and (Inches)
Frames A1 through A4
Control I/O
Frames B and C
Control I/O
Motor Output
Filter Input
Filter Input
Motor Output
SCANport
SCANport
22.2/28.6 (0.88/1.13) - 3 Plcs.
Frame E
Frame D
Filter Input
22.2 (0.88) - 1 Plc.
28.6/34.9 (1.13/1.38) - 3 Plcs.
22.2 (0.88) - 1 Plc.
Filter Input
Motor Output
Control I/O
Motor Output
SCANport
(Side of Drive)
Control I/O
SCANport
34.9/50.0 (1.38/1.97) - 1 Plc.
34.9 (1.38) - 3 Plcs.
62.7/76.2 (2.47/3.00) - 2 Plcs.
88.9/104.8 (3.50/4.13)
2 Plcs.
12.7 (0.50)
3 Plcs.
C–8
CE Conformity
End of Appendix
Appendix
D
Current 1336 PLUS spare parts information including recommended
parts, catalog numbers and pricing can be obtained from the
following sources:
• Allen-Bradley home page on the World Wide Web at
http://www.ab.com
then select . . .
“Drives” followed by . . .
“Product Information” and . . .
“Service Information . . .”
• Standard Drives “AutoFax” service – an automated system that
you can call to request a “faxed” copy of the spare parts information (or other technical document).
Simply call 216-646-6701 (440-646-6701 after 8/16/97) and
follow the phone prompts to request document(s) 1060 (230V
drives) and/or 1070 (460 & 575V drives).
D–2
Variable Content TTL:Chap Is Linked To HD:Running
End of Appendix
Notes
Notes
Notes
Notes
Index
A
E
AC Supply Source, 2–3
EEProm Mode, 3–5
Adapter Definitions, 2–38
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), 1–2
Alarms, 6–8
Encoder Wiring, 2–32
Analog Invert, 5–15
Engineering Unit, 5–6
Auto Restart, 5–22
ENUM, 5–6
B
Bypass Contactors, 2–6
F
Fan Voltage, Selecting/Verifying, 2–35
Fault Buffer History, 5–29
C
Cable Termination, 2–34
Catalog Number Explanation, 1–2
CE Conformity, 2–8, C–1
Common Mode Cores, 2–34
Contacts, Fault, 6–1
Control Interface Option
Board Removal/Installation, 2–37
L4/L4E, 2–30
L5/L5E, 2–31
L6/L6E, 2–32
TB3 Description, 2–25
Control Status Mode, 3–5
Custom Volts/Hz, 5–51
D
DC Brake to Stop, 5–17
Derate Guidelines, A–5
Dimensions
Frame G Mounting Hardware, B–18
Heat Sink Through the Back, B–10,
B–11
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1)
Bottom Views, B–8
Front Views, B–2
IP 65/54 (NEMA Type 4/12),
Enclosure, B–7
TB1 – Frame G, B–17
TB1 – Frames D & E, B–16
Display Mode, 3–5
Distances Between Devices, 2–38
Distribution Systems
Unbalanced, 2–3
Ungrounded, 2–3
Drive Status Structure, A–13
Dwell, 5–21
Faults
Adptr Freq Err, 6–2
Auxiliary, 6–2
BGND 10ms Over, 6–2
Blwn Fuse Flt, 6–2
Diag C Lim Flt, 6–2
Drive –> HIM, 6–2
Drive Fault Reset, 6–2
EE Init Read, 6–2
EE Init Value, 6–2
EEprom Checksum, 6–2
EEprom Fault, 6–2
FGND 10ms Over, 6–2
Ground Fault, 6–3
Ground Warning, 6–3
Hertz Err Fault, 6–3
Hertz Sel Fault, 6–3
HIM –> Drive, 6–3
Loop Overrn Flt, 6–3
Max Retries Fault, 6–3
Motor Mode Flt, 6–3
Motor Stall Fault, 6–4
Neg Slope Fault, 6–4
Op Error Fault, 6–4
Open Pot Fault, 6–4
Overcurrent Flt, 6–4
Overload Fault, 6–4
Overtemp Fault, 6–4
Overvolt Fault, 6–4
P Jump Err Flt, 6–5
Phase U Fault, 6–4
Phase V Fault, 6–5
Phase W Fault, 6–5
Poles Calc Flt, 6–5
Power Loss Fault, 6–5
Power Mode Fault, 6–5
Power Overload, 6–5
Power Test Flt, 6–5
Precharge Fault, 6–5
Precharge Open, 6–5
Reprogram Fault, 6–6
ROM or RAM Fault, 6–6
I–2
Index
Run Boost Fault, 6–6
Serial Fault, 6–6
Shear Pin Fault, 6–6
Temp Sense Open, 6–6
Undervolt Fault, 6–6
UV Short Fault, 6–6
UW Short Fault, 6–6
VW Short Fault, 6–6
Xsistr Desat Flt, 6–6
Motor Starting/Stopping, 2–6
Mounting, 2–1
N
Nameplate Location, 1–4
O
Filtering, RFI, 2–8, 2–9, C–3
Output Configuration, 5–26
Frame References, 1–1
Output Devices, 2–34
Frequency Select, 5–19
Overload, 5–13
Function Index, 5–1
Fusing, Input, 2–5
G
Grounding, 2–8
P
Parameter Cross Ref.
By Name, A–11
By Number, A–10
Parameter Record, A–16
H
Human Interface Module (HIM)
Character Map, A–12
Description, 3–1
Key Descriptions, 3–2
Operation, 3–4
Removal, 3–15
I
Input Devices, 2–6
Input Mode Selection, 2–28
Input Power Conditioning, 2–4
Input/Output Rating, A–2
Interference, EMI/RFI, 2–7
Isolation Transformer, 2–4
L
L4/L4E Option, 2–30
L5/L5E Option, 2–31
L6/L6E Option, 2–32
Line Loss Restart, 5–30
Logic Control Structure, A–13
Low Speed Operation, 4–10
Lug Kits, 2–12
M
Min./Max. Frequency, 5–11
Motor Cable Length, 2–15
Parameters
% Output Curr, 5–9
% Output Power, 5–9
0-10 Volt Hertz, 5–8
2nd Drive Sts, 5–34
4-20 mA Hertz, 5–8
4-20 mA Loss Sel, 5–16
Abs Analog Out, 5–28
Accel Mask, 5–40
Accel Owner, 5–42
Accel Time, 5–10, 5–16
Adaptive I Lim, 5–12
Alarm Mask, 5–41
Analog Invert, 5–15
Analog Out Sel, 5–28
Analog Trim En, 5–15
Anlg Out Offset, 5–28
Base Frequency, 5–53
Base Voltage, 5–53
Blwn Fuse Flt, 5–31
Boost Slope, 5–52
Break Frequency, 5–52
Break Voltage, 5–52
Bus Limit En, 5–18
Clear Fault, 5–29
Control Select, 5–51
CR Out Select, 5–26
Cur Lim Trip En, 5–29
Current Angle, 5–37
Current Limit, 5–11
Current Lmt Sel, 5–12
Data In, 5–43
Data Out, 5–43
DC Boost Select, 5–14
DC Bus Memory, 5–37
DC Bus Voltage, 5–7
Index
DC Hold Level, 5–17
DC Hold Time, 5–17
Decel Mask, 5–40
Decel Owner, 5–42
Decel Time, 5–10, 5–16
Dig Out Current, 5–26
Dig Out Freq, 5–26
Dig Out Torque, 5–27
Digital Out Sel, 5–26
Direction Mask, 5–39
Direction Owner, 5–41
Drive Alarm, 5–34
Drive Direction, 5–35
Drive Rtd Volts, 5–38
Drive Status, 5–34
Drive Type, 5–38
Dwell Frequency, 5–21
Dwell Time, 5–21
EEPROM Cksum, 5–37
Encoder Type, 5–45
Fault Alarms, 5–33
Fault Buffer, 5–29
Fault Data, 5–31
Fault Frequency, 5–32
Fault Mask, 5–40
Fault Owner, 5–42
Firmware Ver., 5–38
Flt Clear Mode, 5–33
Flt Driv Status, 5–32
Flt Motor Mode, 5–31
Flt Power Mode, 5–32
Flux Amps Ref, 5–51
Flux Current, 5–9
Flux Up Time, 5–52
Flying Start En, 5–24
Freq Command, 5–7, 5–35
Freq Ref SqRoot, 5–20
Freq Select, 5–10, 5–19
Freq Source, 5–35
FStart Forward, 5–24
FStart Reverse, 5–24
Ground Warning, 5–33
Heatsink Temp, 5–8, 5–37
Hold Level Sel, 5–17
Input Mode, 5–10, 5–26
Input Status, 5–35
IR Drop Volts, 5–52
Jog Frequency, 5–19
Jog Mask, 5–39
Jog Owner, 5–42
KI Amps, 5–18
KI Process, 5–49
KP Amps, 5–18
KP Process, 5–49
Language, 5–24
Last Fault, 5–9
Latched Alarms, 5–35
Line Loss Fault, 5–29
LLoss Restart, 5–24
Local Mask, 5–40
Local Owner, 5–42
Logic Mask, 5–40
Low Bus Fault, 5–31
Max Traverse, 5–25
Maximum Freq, 5–11, 5–14
Maximum Speed, 5–45
Maximum Voltage, 5–53
Minimum Freq, 5–11, 5–14
MOP Hertz, 5–8
MOP Increment, 5–20
MOP Mask, 5–40
MOP Owner, 5–42
Motor Mode, 5–36
Motor NP Amps, 5–13
Motor NP Hertz, 5–13, 5–46
Motor NP RPM, 5–13, 5–46
Motor NP Volts, 5–13
Motor OL Count, 5–9
Motor OL Fault, 5–29
Motor Poles, 5–45
Motor Type, 5–18
Output Current, 5–7
Output Freq, 5–7
Output Power, 5–7
Output Pulses, 5–37
Output Voltage, 5–7
Overload Amps, 5–13
Overload Mode, 5–12
P Jump, 5–25
PI Config, 5–47
PI Error, 5–49
PI Fdbk Select, 5–48
PI Feedback, 5–49
PI Neg Limit, 5–49
PI Output, 5–49
PI Pos Limit, 5–49
PI Preload, 5–50
PI Ref Select, 5–48
PI Reference, 5–48
Pot Hertz, 5–8
Power Mode, 5–36
Power OL Count, 5–9
Preset Freq, 5–19
Process 1 Par, 5–44
Process 1 Scale, 5–44
Process 1 Txt, 5–44
Process 2 Par, 5–44
Process 2 Scale, 5–44
Process 2 Txt, 5–44
Pulse/Enc Hertz, 5–8, 5–46
Pulse/Enc Scale, 5–21, 5–45
PWM Frequency, 5–15
Rated Amps, 5–38
Rated CT Amps, 5–38
I–3
I–4
Index
Rated CT kW, 5–39
Rated kW, 5–38
Rated VT Amps, 5–39
Rated VT kW, 5–39
Reference Mask, 5–40
Reference Owner, 5–42
Reset/Run Time, 5–23
Reset/Run Tries, 5–22
Run Boost, 5–52
Run On Power Up, 5–22
Run/Accel Boost, 5–15
S Curve Enable, 5–23
S Curve Time, 5–23
Save MOP Ref, 5–20
Set 0–10 Vlt Hi, 5–27
Set 0–10 Vlt Lo, 5–27
Set 4–20 mA Hi, 5–27
Set 4–20 mA Lo, 5–27
Set Anlg Out Hi, 5–28
Set Anlg Out Lo, 5–28
Set Defaults, 5–37
Shear Pin Fault, 5–29
Skip Freq, 5–20
Skip Freq Band, 5–20
Slip Comp Gain, 5–22
[email protected]., 5–22
Speed Adder, 5–46
Speed Control, 5–22, 5–45, 5–47
Speed Error, 5–46
Speed Integral, 5–46
Speed KI, 5–46
Start Boost, 5–52
Start Mask, 5–39
Start Owner, 5–41
Stop Mode Used, 5–36
Stop Owner, 5–41
Stop Select, 5–11, 5–16, 5–18
Torque Current, 5–9
Traverse Period, 5–25
VT Scaling, 5–13
Password Mode, 3–5
Power Loss Ride-Thru, 5–30
Reset Defaults, 4–3
S
S Curve, 5–23
Search Mode, 3–5
Serial Communications, A–13
Skip Frequency, 5–20
Software Compatibility, 1–1
Specifications
Control, A–2
Electrical, A–2
Environment, A–1
Input/Output Ratings, A–2
Protection, A–1
Flux Vector vs. V/Hz, 4–5, 4–11
Speed Select Inputs, 2–26
Startup Procedure, 4–1
Status Display, 3–5
T
Terminal Blocks
Auxiliary Output, 2–37
Locations, 2–11
TB1, 2–12
TB2, 2–22
TB3, 2–25
TB4/TB6, 2–36
Traverse Function, 5–25
Troubleshooting
Clearing a Fault, 6–1
Fault Code Cross Ref., 6–7
Fault Descriptions, 6–1
Fault Display, 6–1
U
User Supplied Enclosures, A–4
Preset Frequency, 5–19
Process Mode, 3–5
Program Mode, 3–5
Programmable Controller Config., A–14
Programming Flow Chart, 5–1
Pulse Input, 2–23
R
Reactors, 2–4
Remote I/O, 5–43
V
Volts/Hz Pattern, 5–51
W
Wiring
Control and Signal, 2–21
Control Interface, 2–23
Encoder, 2–32
Power, 2–11
We Want Our Manuals to be the Best!
You can help! Our manuals must meet the needs of you, the user. This is your opportunity to make sure they do just that.
By filling out this form you can help us provide the most useful, thorough, and accurate manuals available. Please take a
few minutes to tell us what you think - then mail this form or FAX it.
FAX: your local Allen-Bradley Sales Office or 414/512-8579
PUBLICATION NAME ________________________________________________________________________________________________
PUBLICATION NUMBER, DATE AND PART NUMBER (IF PRESENT) _________________________________________________________
✔ CHECK THE FUNCTION THAT MOST CLEARLY DESCRIBES YOUR JOB.
❏ SUGGEST/RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PURCHASE OF EQUIPMENT
❏ MAINTAIN/OPERATE PROGRAMMABLE MACHINERY
❏ DESIGN/IMPLEMENT ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
❏ TRAIN/EDUCATE MACHINE USERS
❏ SUPERVISE FLOOR OPERATIONS
✔ WHAT LEVEL OF EXPERIENCE DO YOU HAVE WITH EACH OF THE FOLLOWING PRODUCTS?
NONE
LITTLE
MODERATE
EXTENSIVE
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL
❏
❏
❏
❏
AC/DC DRIVES
❏
❏
❏
❏
PERSONAL COMPUTERS
❏
❏
❏
❏
NC/CNC CONTROLS
❏
❏
❏
❏
DATA COMMUNICATIONS/LAN
❏
❏
❏
❏
✔ RATE THE OVERALL QUALITY OF THIS MANUAL BY CIRCLING YOUR RESPONSE BELOW. (1) = POOR (5) = EXCELLENT
HELPFULNESS OF INDEX/TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
CLARITY
1
2
3
4
5
EASE OF USE
1
2
3
4
5
ACCURACY AND COMPLETENESS
1
2
3
4
5
QUALITY COMPARED TO OTHER COMPANIES’ MANUALS
1
2
3
4
5
QUALITY COMPARED TO OTHER ALLEN-BRADLEY MANUALS
1
2
3
4
5
✔ WHAT DID YOU LIKE MOST ABOUT THIS MANUAL?
✔ WHAT DID YOU LIKE LEAST ABOUT THIS MANUAL?
CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE
✁
✔ PLEASE LIST ANY ERRORS YOU FOUND IN THIS MANUAL (REFERENCE PAGE, TABLE, OR FIGURE NUMBERS).
✔ DO YOU HAVE ANY ADDITIONAL COMMENTS?
✔ COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING.
NAME __________________________________________________________________________ COMPANY____________________________________________________________________________
TITLE _________________________________________________ DEPARTMENT_______________________________________________
STREET _______________________________________________ CITY _______________________ STATE ______ ZIP
___________________
TELEPHONE ___________________________________________ DATE ______________________________________________________
FOLD HERE
FOLD HERE
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 413
MEQUON, WI
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Attn: Marketing Communications
P.O. Box 760
Mequon, WI 53092-9907
Rockwell Automation helps its customers receive a superior return on their investment by bringing
together leading brands in industrial automation, creating a broad spectrum of easy-to-integrate
products. These are supported by local technical resources available worldwide, a global network
of system solutions providers, and the advanced technology resources of Rockwell.
Worldwide representation.
Argentina • Australia • Austria • Bahrain • Belgium • Bolivia • Brazil • Bulgaria • Canada • Chile • China, People’s Republic of • Colombia • Costa Rica • Croatia • Cyprus
Czech Republic • Denmark • Dominican Republic • Ecuador • Egypt • El Salvador • Finland • France • Germany • Ghana • Greece • Guatemala • Honduras • Hong Kong
Hungary • Iceland • India • Indonesia • Iran • Ireland • Israel • Italy • Jamaica • Japan • Jordan • Korea • Kuwait • Lebanon • Macau • Malaysia • Malta • Mexico
Morocco • The Netherlands • New Zealand • Nigeria • Norway • Oman • Pakistan • Panama • Peru • Philippines • Poland • Portugal • Puerto Rico • Qatar • Romania • Russia
Saudi Arabia • Singapore • Slovakia • Slovenia • South Africa, Republic of • Spain • Sweden • Switzerland • Taiwan • Thailand • Trinidad • Tunisia • Turkey • United Arab Emirates
United Kingdom • United States • Uruguay • Venezuela
Rockwell Automation Headquarters, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414 382-2000, Fax: (1) 414 382-4444
Publication 1336 PLUS-5.0 – August, 1997
Supersedes 1336 PLUS-5.0 dated May, 1997
P/N 74001-003-01 (L)
Copyright 1995 Allen-Bradley Company, Inc.
Printed in USA
">